CData Python Connector for Box

Build 26.0.9655

CData Python Connector for Box

Overview

The CData Python Connector for Box allows developers to write Python scripts with connectivity to Box. The connector wraps the complexity of accessing Box data in an interface commonly used by Python connectors to common database systems.

Key Features

  • WHL installation packages that enable installation with "pip install".
  • Supported for Python 3.10 or newer on Windows, Linux, and macOS.
  • Write and execute SQL queries to fetch and update data in Box.
  • Custom dialect class that enables SQLAlchemy 1.3 and 1.4 to use this connector.

Getting Started

See Getting Started to install the connector to your Python distribution and to create a basic connection to Box.

Using the Python Connector/Using from Tools

See Using the Connector for examples of executing basic SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, and EXECUTE queries with the module's provided classes.

See Using from Tools to connect Box data to tools such as Pandas or Petl.

SQLAlchemy ORM

SQLAlchemy can be leveraged to model the tables in Box with mapped classes. See From SQLAlchemy for instructions for configuring the Python connector with SQLAlchemy.

Pandas

Pandas' DataFrames can be used alongside the connector to generate analytical graphics. See From Pandas for a guide.

Schema Discovery

See Schema Discovery to query the provided system tables, which allows users to discover the available tables, views, and stored procedure, alongside additional information about their columns or parameters.

Advanced Features

Advanced Features details additional features supported by the connector, such as defining user defined views, ssl configuration, remoting, caching, firewall/proxy settings, and advanced logging.

SQL Compliance

See SQL Compliance for a syntax reference and code examples outlining the supported SQL.

Data Model

See Data Model for the available database objects. This section also provides more detailed information on querying specific Box entities.

Connection String Options

The Connection properties describe the various options that can be used to establish a connection.

CData Python Connector for Box

Getting Started

Connecting to Box

For information on the available WHL files for supported environments, and how to install the appropriate file for your Python distribution, see Package Installation.

For information on the module to import, and how to configure the necessary connection properties in a connection string, see Establishing a Connection.

Other available connection properties can be used to configure other aspects of the connector capabilities.

Python Version Support

The CData Python Connector for Box can be installed and used in Python 3.10 or newer.

Box Version Support

The connector models the Box Content API as a relational database, which can be queried with standard SQL.

See Also

  • Using the Connector: Establish connections and query Box through Python code.
  • From SQLAlchemy: Use SQLAlchemy to establish a connection with dialect URL, and interact with Box data using mapped classes and Sessions.

CData Python Connector for Box

Package Installation

Dependencies

The Python connectors require that Python 3.10 or newer be installed.

Installation

The CData Python Connector for Box is available as a WHL file for Windows, Linux, and Mac. Each connector is built using the Python 3.10 Stable ABI (indicated by the abi3 tag in the filename), so a single wheel supports any Python 3.10 or newer installation — there is no need to match your exact Python minor version. Use the "pip install" command with the appropriate WHL file for your platform.

Windows:

pip install cdata_box_connector-26.0.9655-cp310-abi3-win_amd64.whl

Linux:

pip install cdata_box_connector-26.0.9655-cp310-abi3-linux_x86_64.whl

macOS:

pip install cdata_box_connector-26.0.9655-cp310-abi3-macosx_12_0_arm64.whl

The macOS wheel supports arm64 (Apple Silicon) architectures only on macOS 12 and newer.

Regardless of the environment, certain distributions might require that the "pip3 install" command be used instead, to differentiate from a Python 2 distribution that might exist already. After installation, confirm whether the connector is successfully installed by running the "pip list" command. If "cdata_box_connector" is present in the list output by the command, then the installation was successful.

Upgrading

When upgrading, "pip install" does not automatically clean up old JRE files. To avoid leftover files that could cause JVM errors, uninstall the previous version before installing the new one.

Licensing

After the installation is complete, a separate step is needed to activate a license for the connector. Among the CData assets in the distribution's site packages, there is an install-license tool that activates this license. From within the distribution's site-packages folder, after navigating to the "cdata/installlic_box" folder, simply use a command like the below to activate the license. Omitting the <key> argument activates a trial license:

  • Windows:
    ./install-license.exe <key>
  • Linux / Mac:
    ./install-license.sh <key>

Sometimes, file access issues may cause pip to install the connector in a fallback file path that is not the python distribution's main or primary site-packages location. This can make it difficult to find where the connector was installed, and from there, the license activator. In that event, this python script below will print out the full file path of the connector's native file. This file will be stored in the mentioned cdata folder, from which the installlic_box folder is trivial to find:

import os
import cdata.box
path = os.path.abspath(cdata.box.__file__)
print(path)

Uninstallation

If the connector needs to be uninstalled for any reason, do so by running the pip uninstall command, as in the example below:

pip uninstall cdata-box-connector

CData Python Connector for Box

Establishing a Connection

The objects available within our connector are accessible from the "cdata.box" module. To use the module's objects directly:

  1. Import the module as follows:
    import cdata.box as mod
  2. To establish a connection string, call the connect() method from the connector object using an appropriate connection string, such as:
    mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")

Connecting to Box

The connector enables access to metadata for Box tables and folders. Note that the connector cannot update the contents of files stored on Box or model file content as tables and columns.

Authenticating to Box

The connector uses the OAuth authentication standard to connect to Box from either a User account or a Service account.

Box provides embedded OAuth credentials that simplify connection from a Desktop application or a Headless machine. To connect from a Web application, you must create a custom OAuth application, as described in Creating a Custom OAuth Application.

The following subsections describe how to authenticate to Box from the available OAuth flows. For information about how to create a custom OAuth application, and why you might want to create one even for auth flows that already have embedded OAuth credentials, see Creating a Custom OAuth Application.

For a complete list of connection string properties available in Box, see Connection.

User Accounts (OAuth)

AuthScheme must be set to OAuth in all user account flows.

Desktop Applications

CData provides an embedded OAuth application that simplifies OAuth desktop authentication. You can also create and connect through a custom OAuth application. For further information about custom OAuth applications, see Creating a Custom OAuth Application.

Get and Refresh the OAuth Access Token

After setting the following, you are ready to connect:

  • InitiateOAuth: GETANDREFRESH. You can use InitiateOAuth to avoid repeating the OAuth exchange and manually setting the OAuthAccessToken.
  • Custom applications only:
    • OAuthClientId: The client Id assigned when you registered your app.
    • OAuthClientSecret: The client secret assigned when you registered your app.
    • CallbackURL: The redirect URI defined when you registered your app. For example: https://localhost:3333
When you connect, the connector opens Box's OAuth endpoint in your default browser. Log in and grant permissions to the application. The connector then completes the OAuth process:
  1. The connector obtains an access token from Box and uses it to request data.
  2. The OAuth values are saved in the location specified in OAuthSettingsLocation, to be persisted across connections.
The connector refreshes the access token automatically when it expires.

Web Applications

When connecting via a Web application, you must create and register a custom OAuth application with Box. You can then use the connector to get and manage the OAuth token values. For further information, see Creating a Custom OAuth Application.

Get an OAuth Access Token

Set the following connection properties to obtain the OAuthAccessToken:

  • OAuthClientId: The client Id noted in your custom OAuth application settings.
  • OAuthClientSecret: The client secret noted in your custom OAuth application settings.

Now call stored procedures to complete the OAuth exchange:

  1. Call the GetOAuthAuthorizationURL stored procedure. Set the CallbackURL input to the Redirect URI you specified when you configured your custom OAuth application. The stored procedure returns the URL to the OAuth endpoint.
  2. Navigate to the URL that the stored procedure returned in Step 1. Log in, and authorize the web application. After authenticating, the browser redirects you to the redirect URI. There will be a parameter called code appended to the redirect URI. Note the value of this parameter.
  3. Call the GetOAuthAccessToken stored procedure. Set the AuthMode input to WEB. Set the Verifier input to the code parameter in the query string of the redirect URI.

After you have obtained the access and refresh tokens, you can connect to data and refresh the OAuth access token either automatically or manually.

Automatic Refresh of the OAuth Access Token

To have the connector automatically refresh the OAuth access token, set the following on the first data connection:

Manual Refresh of the OAuth Access Token

The only value needed to manually refresh the OAuth access token when connecting to data is the OAuth refresh token. Use the RefreshOAuthAccessToken stored procedure to manually refresh the OAuthAccessToken after the ExpiresIn parameter value returned by GetOAuthAccessToken has elapsed. Now, set the following connection properties:

  • OAuthClientId: The client Id noted in your custom OAuth application settings.
  • OAuthClientSecret: The client secret noted in your custom OAuth application settings.

Now call RefreshOAuthAccessToken with OAuthRefreshToken set to the OAuth refresh token returned by GetOAuthAccessToken. After the new tokens have been retrieved, open a new connection by setting the OAuthAccessToken property to the value returned by RefreshOAuthAccessToken.

Finally, store the OAuth refresh token so that you can use it to manually refresh the OAuth access token after it has expired.

Headless Machines

To configure the driver to use OAuth with a user account on a headless machine, you must authenticate on another device that has an internet browser.

  1. Choose one of two options:
    • Option 1: Obtain the OAuthVerifier value, as described in "Obtain and Exchange a Verifier Code" below.
    • Option 2: Install the connector on a machine with an internet browser and transfer the OAuth authentication values after you authenticate through the usual browser-based flow, as described in "Transfer OAuth Settings" below.
  2. Then configure the connector to automatically refresh the access token on the headless machine.

Option 1: Obtain and Exchange a Verifier Code

To obtain a verifier code, you must authenticate at the OAuth authorization URL.

Follow the steps below to authenticate from the machine with an internet browser and obtain the OAuthVerifier connection property.

  1. Choose one of these options:
    • If you are using the Embedded OAuth Application, call the GetOAuthAuthorizationURL stored procedure. Open the URL returned by the stored procedure in a browser.
    • If you are using a custom OAuth application, set the following properties: Then call the GetOAuthAuthorizationURL stored procedure with the appropriate CallbackURL. Open the URL returned by the stored procedure in a browser.
  2. Log in and grant permissions to the connector. You are redirected to the redirect URI. Notice that a parameter called code is appended to the redirect URI. Note the value of this parameter; it is used to set the OAuthVerifier connection property.

Next, you must exchange the OAuth verifier code for OAuth refresh and access tokens.

At the headless machine, to obtain the OAuth authentication values, set these properties:

  • InitiateOAuth: REFRESH.
  • OAuthVerifier: The noted verifier code (the value of the code parameter in the redirect URI).
  • OAuthSettingsLocation: persist the encrypted OAuth authentication values to the specified location.
  • Custom applications only:
    • OAuthClientId: The client Id in your custom OAuth application settings.
    • OAuthClientSecret: The client secret in your custom OAuth application settings.

Test the connection to generate the OAuth settings file, then re-set the following properties to connect:

  • InitiateOAuth: REFRESH.
  • OAuthSettingsLocation: The location containing the encrypted OAuth authentication values. Make sure this location gives read and write permissions to the connector to enable the automatic refreshing of the access token.
  • Custom applications only:
    • OAuthClientId: The client Id assigned when you registered your custom OAuth application.
    • OAuthClientSecret: The client secret assigned when you registered your custom OAuth application.

Option 2: Transfer OAuth Settings

Prior to connecting on a headless machine, you must install and create a connection with the driver on a device that supports an internet browser. Set the connection properties as described in "Desktop Applications" above.

After completing the instructions in "Desktop Applications", the resulting authentication values are encrypted and written to the location specified by OAuthSettingsLocation. The default filename is OAuthSettings.txt.

Test the connection to generate the OAuth settings file, then copy the OAuth settings file to your headless machine.

On the headless machine, set the following connection properties to connect to data:

  • InitiateOAuth: REFRESH.
  • OAuthSettingsLocation: The location of the OAuth settings file you copied from the machine with the browser. Make sure this location gives read and write permissions to the connector to enable the automatic refreshing of the access token.
  • Custom applications only:
    • OAuthClientId: The client Id assigned when you registered your custom OAuth application.
    • OAuthClientSecret: The client secret assigned when you registered your custom OAuth application.

Service Account (OAuthJWT)

Service accounts have silent authentication, which does not require user authentication in the browser. You can also use a service account to delegate enterprise-wide access scopes to the connector.

To use a service account, you must create and authorize a custom OAuth application, as described in Creating a Custom OAuth Application. You can then connect to whatever Box data the service account is permitted to access.

After setting the following connection properties, you are ready to connect:

  • AuthScheme: OAuthJWT.
  • OAuthClientId: The client Id noted in your custom OAuth application settings.
  • OAuthClientSecret: The client secret noted in your custom OAuth application settings.
  • OAuthJWTCertType: PEMKEY_FILE.
  • OAuthJWTCert: The path to the .pem file you generated.
  • OAuthJWTCertPassword: The password of the .pem file.
  • OAuthJWTCertSubject: The subject of the certificate. If you want to select the first certificate in the Certificate Store, set an * (asterisk).
  • OAuthJWTSubjectType: The same as what you specified in your Application Access Values; either "enterprise" or "user". The default value of this connection property is "enterprise".
  • OAuthJWTSubject: If your subject type is set to enterprise, this should be your enterprise Id. If your subject type is set to user, this should be your application user Id.
  • OAuthJWTPublicKeyId: The Id of your public key in your application settings.

When you connect the connector completes the OAuth flow for a service account.

  1. Creates and signs the JWT with the claim set required by the connector.
  2. Exchanges the JWT for the access token.
  3. Saves OAuth values in OAuthSettingsLocation to be persisted across connections.
  4. Submits the JWT for a new access token when the token expires.

BOXJSON OAuthJWTCertType

To authenticate using a service account and the BOXJSON OauthJWTCertType, set these properties:

In cases where it may not be feasible to use a file in your system. you can copy the contents of the JSON file directly into the connection string. Set these properties:

CData Python Connector for Box

Configuring JNI

Java Native Interface (JNI) is a standard programming interface for writing Java native methods and embedding the Java virtual machine into native applications.

The connector leverages the JNI for improved performance on Mac and Linux.

Configure the Config INI File

The Linux and Mac editions of the Box python connector are configured with an ini file. This file is used to set several parameters, including JNI behavior. This file is to be located in:

{path_to_distribution_site-packages}/cdata/config.ini

Ensure that any configuration properties you set in the ini file fall under the following section name (adjust the 311 number if you are using an different python version from 3.11):

  • For Linux:
    [box.cpython-311-x86_64-linux-gnu.so]
  • For Mac:
    [box.cpython-311-darwin.so]

Configure the JNI connector's behavior by editing the properties in the connector's config.ini file. The connector can be configured as follows:

  • LOGFILE: Set this the same way as the CDATA_LOGFILE envrionment variable below.
  • JAVA_HOME: Configure the path to the JVM library location used to launch the JVM.
  • CLASS_PATH: Use a colon-separated list to configure the paths to the third-party jar libraries.

Configure Environment Variables

Additionally, set the following environment variables:

  • CDATA_JAVA_HOME: Configure the path to the JVM library location used to launch the JVM.
  • CDATA_JVM_OPTIONS: Place JVM options here.
  • CDATA_LOGFILE: Set this in the following scheme: <SCHEME>://<TAG>[|<LEVEL>]

    • SCHEME: The options are STDOUT, FILE.
      • STDOUT: Both the native wrapper and odbc core log into stdout. The Logfile and Verbosity properties can override the behavior of ODBC core.
      • FILE: The native wrapper logs into <FILENAME> while the odbc core logs into <FILENAME>.driver.log. The Logfile and Verbosity properties can override the behavior of ODBC core.
    • TAG
      • For STDOUT, set this to 1. For FILE, set this to the filename.
    • LEVEL
      • Set to one of: FATAL | ERROR | WARNING | INFO | DEBUG

The following are some examples of this syntax:

  • STDOUT://1|DEBUG
  • FILE:///tmp/my_py.log|DEBUG

Custom Logger

The Python connector supports a custom logging mechanism for redirecting log output to any destination, such as a cloud storage service or logging framework. Use setCustomLoggerFactory() to register a factory function that creates a logger instance for each connection.

The factory function receives the context string from the Logfile connection property (the portion after CUSTOM://) and must return an object with a writeLog(verbosity, message) method.

To enable custom logging:

  1. Call setCustomLoggerFactory() with your factory function before opening connections.
  2. Set Logfile to CUSTOM:// followed by a context string to identify the connection.
  3. Set Verbosity to the desired log level.

The following example demonstrates a custom logger factory that creates a separate logger instance per connection:

import cdata.box as mod
import time

class MyLogger:
    def __init__(self, loggerId):
        self.loggerId = loggerId
    def writeLog(self, verbosity, message):
        print("[MyLogger " + self.loggerId + "] " + message)

def createLogger(context):
    return MyLogger(context[len("MyLoggerId="):])

mod.setCustomLoggerFactory(createLogger)

conn1 = mod.connect("...;Logfile=CUSTOM://MyLoggerId=1;Verbosity=2;")
# do something with conn1
time.sleep(1)  # Wait for logs to flush from conn1

conn2 = mod.connect("...;Logfile=CUSTOM://MyLoggerId=2;Verbosity=2;")
# do something with conn2
time.sleep(1)  # Wait for logs to flush from conn2

CData Python Connector for Box

Creating a Custom OAuth Application

Creating a Custom OAuth Application

CData embeds OAuth Application Credentials with CData branding that can be used when connecting via a desktop application or headless application.

You may choose to use your own OAuth Application Credentials when you want to:

  • control branding of the authentication dialog
  • control the redirect URI that the application redirects the user to after the user authenticates
  • customize the permissions that you are requesting from the user

Procedure

This procedure creates a custom OAuth application, registers that application, and generates values that are used to configure the OAuthClientId and OAuthClientSecret.

At the Box Enterprise Developer Console:

  1. Log in to your Box developers dashboard.
  2. Click Create New App.
  3. Specify basic application information, as appropriate.
  4. Specify your application type (e.g., Custom App).
  5. Select the User Authentication (OAuth 2.0) authentication method.
  6. Set the Redirect URI:
    • If this is a desktop application or headless machine application, set the Redirect URI to http://localhost:33333 or a different port number.
    • If this is a web application, set the Redirect URI to https://<yourwebappserver>:<port>.
  7. Click Create App.
  8. The next task is to create a public and private key pair.
    • To create a keypair from the Developer Console:
      1. Navigate to the Developer Console Configuration tab.
      2. Scroll down to Add and Manage Public Keys.
      3. Click Generate a Public/Private Keypair. Box creates a keypair in a JSON file, and downloads that file to your desktop. You can then move that file to your application code.

        Note: Box does not back up private keys for security reasons. Be careful to back up the Public/Private JSON file. If you lose your private key, you must reset the entire keypair.

    • To add a keypair manually:
      1. Open a terminal window and run the following OpenSSL commands:
        openssl genrsa -des3 -out private.pem 2048
        openssl rsa -in private.pem -outform PEM -pubout -out public.pem

        Note: To run OpenSSL in a Windows environment, install the Cygwin package.

      2. At the Developer Console, navigate to the configuration tab for the Custom OAuth application you just created.
      3. Scroll down to Add and Manage Public Keys.
      4. Click Add a Public Key.
      5. Click Verify and Save.
  9. Before the custom application can be used, a Box Admin must authorize it within the Box Admin Console.
    1. Navigate to your application within the Developer Console.
    2. Click the Authorization tab.
    3. At the prompt to Submit app for authorization for access to the Enterprise, click Review and Submit.
      Your Box Enterprise Admin approves the application.
  10. Finally, select the scope of user permissions your custom OAuth application must request.

After your application is created and registered, click Configuration from the main menu to access your settings. Note the displayed Redirect URI, Client ID, and Client Secret. You will need these values later.

When JWT Access Scopes Change

If you change the JWT access scopes, you must reauthorize the application in the enterprise admin console:

  1. Click Apps in the main manu.
  2. Select the ellipsis button next to your JWT application name.
  3. Select Reauthorize App in the menu.

CData Python Connector for Box

Changelog

General Changes

DateVersionSourceCategoryTypeDescription
2026-06-0126.0.9648BoxData ModelAdded
  • Added the FileId filter to retrieve file collaborations.
  • Added the AccessibleByIsActive, AccessibleByName, CreatedByLogin, CreatedByName, ExpiresAt, InviteEmail, IsAccessOnly, and ItemName columns.
2026-05-2726.0.9643GeneralConnectionRemoved
  • Removed the deprecated ReplaceInvalidTypesWithNull connection property. Use the ReplaceInvalidValuesWithNull property instead.
2026-05-2226.0.9638PythonRemoved
  • Remove support for Intel x64 architecture on macOS
2026-05-0726.0.9623GeneralData ModelAdded
  • Added the ColumnCapabilities column to the sys_tablecolumns system table. This column is a bit mask denoting the column's write capabilities.
2026-05-0726.0.9623PythonChanged
  • Updated embedded JRE to jre-17.0.19+10 (Linux x64 / MacOs x64).
2026-04-1526.0.9601GeneralQuery ExecChanged
  • String comparisons using GREATER, LESS, and CONTAINS operators are now case-insensitive by default.
2026-04-0826.0.9594BoxSecurityChanged
  • TLS 1.3 is now supported by default for HTTP connections.
2026-03-2625.0.9581BoxData ModelAdded
  • Added the DeleteExternalUsers stored procedure.
2026-01-1325.0.9509GeneralAdded
  • Added support for the REGEXP_REPLACE() string function.
2025-12-2125.0.9486PythonAdded
  • Added support for custom loggers in Python connectors on Linux and macOS.
2025-12-0525.0.9470GeneralAdded
  • Added support for the INSERT INTO SELECT statement, with driver-side execution for providers that do not support the operation natively.
2025-10-3025.0.9434PythonChanged
  • Updated embedded JRE to jre-17.0.17+10 (Linux x64 / MacOs x64).
2025-10-0625.0.9410GeneralAdded
  • Support for parsing datetime formats using ".S" and ",S" for milliseconds and nanoseconds.
2025-09-1225.0.9386GeneralAdded
  • Added the IsInsertable, IsUpdateable, and IsDeleteable columns to the sys_tables table.
2025-09-1025.0.9384GeneralChanged
  • All columns in statically defined Views are now reported as read-only.
2025-09-0325.0.9377GeneralChanged
  • Corrected the behavior when IN criteria with NULL values are used in the projection part. It now returns NULL instead of 0. For example, "NULL IN (1,2)" returns "NULL".
2025-09-0125.0.9375GeneralAdded
  • Added support for using the CAST function with infinity values. This function can cast "inf" and "-inf" to DOUBLE, FLOAT, or REAL.
2025-08-2125.0.9364GeneralChanged
  • Report behavior change:
    • Fixed inconsistent string value comparisons in non-table queries.
    • For example, "SELECT 'A' = 'a'" previously returned false, but it now returns true.
2025-08-1325.0.9356GeneralChanged
  • Changed the maximum number of pages held in memory from 15 to 5 for the page providers to decrease heap usage.
2025-07-0725.0.9319PythonRemoved
  • Removed the 32-bit version of Windows Python.
2025-07-0225.0.9314PythonRemoved
  • Removed support for Python 3.9.
2025-06-2525.0.9307GeneralRemoved
  • Removed the "ADLS Gen 1" value from the ConnectionType property.
2025-06-2525.0.9307PythonAdded
  • Added support for Python 3.13 in Windows, Linux, and Mac editions.
2025-06-2525.0.9307PythonRemoved
  • Removed support for Python 3.8 as it is no longer supported.
2025-06-2025.0.9302GeneralAdded
  • Created the following functions:
    • TEXT_ENCODE: encodes a string into a different charset (UTF8 → UTF7 and returns a binary array as the result).
    • TEXT_DECODE: takes a binary array and decodes it back into a string when provided the charset.
    • BASE64_ENCODE: takes a binary array and encodes it as a base64 string (varchar).
    • BASE64_DECODE: takes a base 64-encoded string and decodes it into a binary array.
2025-06-1825.0.9300GeneralChanged
  • The internal code for exception handling has been refactored. Exception messages returned during certain error conditions may now have different wording or formatting.
2025-05-2725.0.9278GeneralRemoved
  • Removed the "Proprietary" enum option from ProxyAuthscheme.
2025-05-1225.0.9263PythonChanged
  • Updated embedded JRE to jre-17.0.15+6 (Linux x64 / MacOS x64) and jre-17.0.15+6 (MacOS aarch64).
2025-02-1524.0.9177GeneralAdded
  • Added support for converting unsigned integer types to the nearest signed data type that has enough precision to hold the unsigned value.This is done for JDBC only because it does not have support for unsigned data types.
2024-11-2724.0.9097GeneralAdded
  • Added ThreadId to LogModule output. Logfile lines now include the Thread ID associated with the action being performed.
2024-11-2024.0.9090BoxAdded
  • Added the SearchRootId mirrored column to the Folders, Files, Bookmarks table.
  • Added query slicer support for Bookmarks table on Id and ParentId columns.
2024-11-1524.0.9085BoxAdded
  • Added query slicer support for Files table on ParentId column.
  • Added query slicer support for Folders table on Id and ParentId columns.
2024-06-2524.0.8942BoxAdded
  • Added support for the OAuthClient authentication method (Client Credentials authentication). To configure, set AuthScheme=OAuthClient.
  • Added the SubjectId connection property, which specifies the user ID of the person for whom the application is requesting delegated access.
  • Added the SubjectType connection property, which sets the subject type for Client Credentials authentication.
2024-06-0524.0.8922PythonAdded
  • Added support for Python 3.12.
2024-05-3024.0.8916BoxRemoved
  • Removed the Auto AuthScheme option. The default value for the AuthScheme connection property is now OAuth.
2024-05-0924.0.8895GeneralChanged
  • The ROUND function previously did not accept negative precision values. That feature has now been restored.
2024-04-0923.0.8865BoxAdded
  • Added the IsPlatformAccessOnly column to the Users table.
2024-04-0523.0.8861BoxAdded
  • Added LegalPolicies table, which accesses content from Legal Hold Policies.
2024-03-1523.0.8840GeneralAdded
  • Created a new SQL function called STRING_COMPARE that provides java's String.compare() ability to SQL queries. Returns a number representative of the compared value of two strings
2024-02-1923.0.8815BoxChanged
  • Changed delimiter of TemplateValues in AddMetadataTemplatesToFile stored procedure from comma to semicolon.
2024-02-1323.0.8809BoxAdded
  • Added the SignRequestPayloadPath parameter to the CreateSignRequest stored procedure for creating a Box sign request with the HTTP request payload read from the absolute file path specified in the parameter. This replaces the previous functionality intended for the same purpose which was triggered by the SignRequestPayload parameter.
2024-01-1023.0.8775BoxAdded
  • Added RecentItems view for listing recent items.
  • Added Collections view for listing all collections.
  • Added CreateSignRequest stored procedure for creating Box sign requests.
  • Added SignRequests view for listing all sign requests.
  • Added ExposeCollectionViews connection property for exposing collections as separate views. These views can be used to retrieve the metadata of files and folder in the corresponding collection.
  • Added AsUserId connection property for user impersonation. This functionality is also available through columns/pseudo-columns across the data model with the same name. The value specified in the column/pseudo-column takes higher precendence than the value specified in the connection property.
2023-11-2923.0.8733GeneralChanged
  • The ROUND function doesn't accept the negative precision values anymore.
2023-11-2923.0.8733GeneralChanged
  • The returning types of the FDMonth, FDQuarter, FDWeek, LDMonth, LDQuarter, LDWeek functions are changed from Timestamp to Date.
  • The return type of the ABS function will be consistent with the parameter value type.
2023-11-2823.0.8732GeneralAdded
  • Added the HMACSHA256 formatter to allow for secrets to be decoded if it is in base64 format
2023-09-1823.0.8661BoxAdded
  • Added support for server-side authentication with JWT using the JSON configuration of a custom JWT Box application with the BOXJSON option in OAuthJWTCertType connection property.
  • BOXJSONBLOB option is just like BOXJSON but with the JSON configuration taken from the connection string.
2023-09-1423.0.8657BoxAdded
  • Added support for the RestoreItem stored procedure. It restores a trashed item (file/folder) by providing an itemId and a itemType
2023-08-2923.0.8641PythonAdded
  • Added support for SQLAlchemy 2.0.
2023-06-2223.0.8573BoxAdded
  • Added the AdditionalDetails column to the UserEvents view.
2023-06-2023.0.8571GeneralAdded
  • Added the new sys_lastresultinfo system table.
2023-05-1923.0.8539PythonAdded
  • Added support for Python 3.11 on Windows, Linux and Mac.
2023-05-1623.0.8536PythonRemoved
  • Removed support for Python 3.7 on Windows and Linux
2023-04-2523.0.8515GeneralRemoved
  • Removed support for the SELECT INTO CSV statement. The core code doesn't support it anymore.
2022-12-1422.0.8383GeneralChanged
  • Added the Default column to the sys_procedureparameters table.
2022-12-1322.0.8382BoxAdded
  • Added UpdateFile and DeleteFile Stored procedures
2022-11-1522.0.8354PythonChanged
  • Updated embedded JRE to jre8u345-b01(Linux x64 / MacOS x64) and jre-17.0.5+8(MacOS aarch64).
2022-09-3022.0.8308GeneralChanged
  • Added the IsPath column to the sys_procedureparameters table.
2022-08-3022.0.8277BoxAdded
  • Added binary output and encoded content support for DownloadFile. Added FileStream as an input, and FileData as an output.
  • Added binary output and encoded content support for CreateSchema. Added FileStream as an input, and FileData as an output.
2022-08-2622.0.8273BoxAdded
  • Added support for impersonating multiple users at the same time.
2022-08-2222.0.8269BoxAdded
  • Added binary input support for upload stored procedures.
  • Added Content, FileName, CreatedAt, ModifiedAt, Hash as inputs and VersionId, Hash, Etag as outputs for UploadFile.
  • Added Content, ModifiedAt, Hash, IfMatch as inputs and VersionId, Hash, Etag as outputs for UploadFileVersion.
2022-05-1822.0.8173PythonAdded
  • Added support for Python 3.10 on Windows, Linux, and Mac
  • Added support for Python 3.9 on Mac
  • Added support for Mac M1
2022-05-1822.0.8173PythonRemoved
  • Removed support for Python 3.6 on Windows and Linux
2021-11-0121.0.7975BoxAdded
  • Added the FileMetadataInstances view.
2021-10-2021.0.7963BoxAdded
  • Added the ClassificationName column to the UserEvents table.
2021-09-0221.0.7915GeneralAdded
  • Added support for the STRING_SPLIT table-valued function in the CROSS APPLY clause.
2021-08-0721.0.7889GeneralChanged
  • Added the KeySeq column to the sys_foreignkeys table.
2021-08-0621.0.7888GeneralChanged
  • Added the new sys_primarykeys system table.
2021-07-2321.0.7874GeneralChanged
  • Updated the Literal Function Names for relative date/datetime functions. Previously, relative date/datetime functions resolved to a different value when used in the projection as opposed to the predicate. For example: SELECT LAST_MONTH() AS lm, Col FROM Table WHERE Col > LAST_MONTH(). Formerly, the two LAST_MONTH() methods would resolve to different datetimes. Now, they will match.
  • As a replacement for the previous behavior, the relative date/datetime functions in the criteria may have an 'L' appended to them. For example: WHERE col > L_LAST_MONTH(). This will continue to resolve to the same values that were previously calculated in the criteria. Note that the "L_" prefix will only work in the predicate - it not available for the projection.
2021-04-2521.0.7785GeneralAdded
  • Added support for handling client side formulas during insert / update. For example: UPDATE Table SET Col1 = CONCAT(Col1, " - ", Col2) WHERE Col2 LIKE 'A%'
2021-04-2321.0.7783GeneralChanged
  • Updated how display sizes are determined for varchar primary key and foreign key columns so they will match the reported length of the column.
2021-04-1621.0.7776GeneralAdded
  • Non-conditional updates between two columns is now available to all drivers. For example: UPDATE Table SET Col1=Col2
2021-04-1621.0.7776GeneralChanged
  • Reduced the length to 255 for varchar primary key and foreign key columns.
2021-04-1621.0.7776GeneralChanged
  • Updated implicit and metadata caching to improve performance and support for multiple connections. Old metadata caches are not compatible - you need to generate new metadata caches if you are currently using CacheMetadata.
2021-04-1621.0.7776GeneralChanged
  • Updated index naming convention to avoid duplicates.
2020-12-0320.0.7642BoxChanged
  • Custom fields in the Files table will now be listed as **(Scope)_(Template)_(Key)** to avoid collisions.

CData Python Connector for Box

Using the Connector

This section provides a walk-through for writing Box data access code in Python script.

For more information on the available data source entities and how to query them with SQL, see Data Model. For the SQL syntax, see SQL Compliance.

Connecting from Code

For information on how to deploy the connector and configure the connection to Box, see Package Installation and Establishing a Connection.

For information on how to connect with the box.connector module and its related classes, see Connecting.

Executing SQL

The connection's cursor object is used to directly execute SQL queries. For information on how to execute SELECT statements and process the returned result sets, see Querying Data. For information on to modify the data in Box with INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE statements, see Modifying Data .

Executing Stored Procedures

You can call stored procedures by using the EXECUTE statement. For further information, see Calling Stored Procedures.

CData Python Connector for Box

Connecting

Connecting with the cdata.box Module:

The connector's module is used directly to establish a connection with the data source. It does this by using a connection string as its argument. For example:
import cdata.box as mod
conn = mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")

Once the connection is created, you can use it to execute subsequent SQL queries.

CData Python Connector for Box

Querying Data

After connecting as described in Connecting, you can use the open connection to execute SQL statements.

Executing Queries

To execute SQL statements that return data, use the execute() method. Once a query is executed, the result set is fetched from the cursor. This result set can then be iterated over to process the records individually.

For example:

cur = conn.execute("SELECT Id, Name FROM Files")
rs = cur.fetchall()
for row in rs:
	print(row)

Parameterized Queries

Various Python collections, such as arrays and tuples, can act as additional arguments for the execute() method. This enables you to parameterize the queries executed and help to prevent SQL Injection.

For example:

cmd = "SELECT Id, Name FROM Files WHERE Id = ?"
params = ["123"]
cur = conn.execute(cmd, params)
rs = cur.fetchall()
for row in rs:
	print(row)

CData Python Connector for Box

Modifying Data

The connection is also used to issue INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE commands to the data source. Parameters can be used with these statements if desired.

Note that the connector does not support transactions. As with normal write operations, all SQL statements executed by this connector affect the data source immediately. Call the connection's commit() method following the execution.

Insert

The following example adds a new record to the table:
cmd = "INSERT INTO Files (Id, Name) VALUES (?, ?)"
params = ["Sunset", "Sunset"]
cur = conn.execute(cmd, params)
print("Records affected: ", cur.rowcount)

Update

The following example modifies an existing record in the table:
cmd = "UPDATE Files SET Name = ? WHERE Id = ?"
params = ["Sunset", "123"]
cur = conn.execute(cmd, params)
print("Records affected: ", cur.rowcount)

Delete

The following example removes an existing record from the table:

cmd = "DELETE FROM Files WHERE Id = ?"
params = ["123"]
cur = conn.execute(cmd, params)
print("Records affected: ", cur.rowcount)

CData Python Connector for Box

Calling Stored Procedures

You can execute stored procedures using either the execute() or callproc() method of the connection.

Calling Stored Procedures Using Execute()

When you call stored procedures by issuing EXECUTE commands, the stored procedure arguments are parameterized. For example:
cmd = "EXECUTE UploadFile FilePath = ?"
params = ["Sunset.jpg"]
conn.execute(cmd, params)

Calling Stored Procedures Using Callproc()

When you call stored procedured by issuing the callproc() method, the stored procedure arguments are a procedure name and a list of parameters. For example:
cur = conn.cursor()
params = ["Sunset.jpg"]
cur.callproc("UploadFile", params)

CData Python Connector for Box

Using from Tools

The connector is integrated with other tools and packages within Python.

Python Integration Guides

The following sections show how to create and use connections with the connector in common packages in Python:

Complete List of Box Integration Quickstarts

For information on connecting from other applications, see Box integration guides.

CData Python Connector for Box

From SQLAlchemy

The CData Python Connector for Box includes a Dialect class that enables integration with SQLAlchemy. Bear in mind that several aspects of connector functionality are not currently supported in SQLAlchemy 2.0 or above. If necessary, downgrade SQLAlchemy to version 1.4 or 1.3 before using this connector.

The following sections detail various aspects of this integration:

Connecting From SQLAlchemy

To construct a URL with which SQLAlchemy loads and uses the appropriate connector automatically, see Connecting

Reflecting Metadata With SQLAlchemy

To learn how to model Box tables with mapped classes, see Reflecting Metadata.

Querying Data From SQLAlchemy

To learn how to use mapped classes to query the associated tables, see Querying Data.

Modifying Data From SQLAlchemy

The connector provides INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE functionality in SQLAlchemy. To learn how to call the session's execute() method to affect the data in the data source, see Modifying Data.

CData Python Connector for Box

Connecting

Connecting With a Dialect URL

Establishing a connection using SQLAlchemy requires a specific URL format.
from sqlalchemy import create_engine
engine = create_engine("box:///?InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")

For SQLAlchemy 2.0, the dialect name is box_2. To establish a connection, use the following URL format:

from sqlalchemy import create_engine
engine = create_engine("box_2:///?InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")

CData Python Connector for Box

Reflecting Metadata

SQLAlchemy can act as an Object-relational Map (ORM). This enables you to treat records of a database table as instantiable records. To leverage this functionality, you must reflect the underlying metadata in one of the following ways.

Note: The following examples employ SQLAlchemy 1.4.

Modeling Data Using a Mapping Class

Use "sqlalchemy.ext.declarative.declarative_base" to declare a mapping class for the table you wish to model in the ORM. A known table in the data model is modeled either partially or completely, as shown in the following example:
from sqlalchemy.ext.declarative import declarative_base
Base = declarative_base()
class Files(Base):
	__tablename__ = "Files"
	Id = Column(String, primary_key=True)
	Id = Column(String)
	Name = Column(String)

Automatically Reflecting Metadata

Rather than mapping tables manually, SQLAlchemy can discover the metadata for one or more tables automatically. To accomplish this across the entire data model, use automap_base:
from sqlalchemy import MetaData
from sqlalchemy.ext.automap import automap_base
meta = MetaData()
abase = automap_base(metadata=meta)
abase.prepare(autoload_with=engine)
Files = abase.classes.Files

You can also reflect a single table with an inspector. When reflecting this way, providing a list of specific columns to map is optional:

from sqlalchemy import MetaData, Table
from sqlalchemy import inspect
meta = MetaData()
insp = inspect(engine)
Files_table = Table("Files", meta)
insp.reflect_table(Files_table, ["Id","Name"])

CData Python Connector for Box

Querying Data

After you use the steps in Connecting to connect, and use one of the methods in Reflecting Metadata to reflect some of the metadata, you can use a session object to query data.

Querying Data Using the Query Method

If the mapping class has been prepared, use it with a session object to query the data source. After binding the engine to the session, provide the mapping class to the session's query method.

For example:

engine = create_engine("box:///?InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")
factory = sessionmaker(bind=engine)
session = factory()
for instance in session.query(Files).filter_by(Id="123"):
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("Name: ", instance.Name)
	print("---------")

Querying Data Using the Execute Method

The session object can also run the query with the execute() method alongside the appropriate Table object. Assuming you have an active session, the following is just as viable:
Files_table = Files.metadata.tables["Files"]
for instance in session.execute(Files_table.select().where(Files_table.c.Id == "123")):
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("FullName: ", instance.Name)
	print("City: ", instance.BillingCity)
	print("---------")

CData Python Connector for Box

Executing JOINs

Implicit Joining

If mapped classes of related Box objects have a singular foreign key relationship, the classes are implicitly joined. After importing the necessary objects, a relationship is established between your two mapped classes, as in the example below:
from sqlalchemy.ext.declarative import declarative_base
from sqlalchemy import Column, String, Integer, DateTime, ForeignKey
from sqlalchemy.orm import sessionmaker, relationship

Base = declarative_base()
class Contact(Base):
	__tablename__ = "Contact"
	Id = Column(Integer, primary_key=True)
	Name = Column(String)
	Email = Column(String)
	BirthDate = Column(DateTime)
	AccountId = Column(String, ForeignKey("Account.Id"))
	Account_Link = relationship("Account", back_populates="Contact_Link")

class Account(Base):
	__tablename__ = "Account"
	Id = Column(String, primary_key=True)
	Name = Column(String)
	BillingCity = Column(String)
	NumberOfEmployees = Column(Integer)
	Contact_Link = relationship("Contact", order_by=Contact.Id, back_populates="Account_Link")

Once the relationship is established, the tables are queried simultaneously using the session's query() method. For example:

rs = session.query(Account, Contact).filter(Account.Id == Contact.AccountId)
for Ac, Ct in rs:
  print("AccountId: ", Ac.Id)
  print("AccountName: ", Ac.Name)
  print("ContactId: ", Ct.Id)
  print("ContactName: ", Ct.Name)

Other Join Forms

In situations where mapped classes have either no foreign keys or multiple foreign keys, you may need different forms of the JOIN query to accommodate them. Using the earlier classes as examples, the following JOIN queries are possible as well:
  • Explicit condition (necessary if there are no foreign keys in your mapped classes):
    rs = session.query(Account, Contact).join(Contact, Account.Id == Contact.AccountId)
    for Ac, Ct in rs:
  • Left-to-right relationship:
    rs = session.query(Account, Contact).join(Account.Contact_Link)
    for Ac, Ct in rs:
  • Left-to-right relationship with explicit target:
    rs = session.query(Account, Contact).join(Contact, Account.Contact_Link)
    for Ac, Ct in rs:
  • String form of a left-to-right relationship:
    rs = session.query(Account, Contact).join("Contact_Link")
    for Ac, Ct in rs:

CData Python Connector for Box

Other SQL Clauses

SQLAlchemy ORM also exposes support for other clauses in SQL, such as ORDER BY, GROUP BY, LIMIT, and OFFSET. All of these are supported by this connector:

ORDER BY

The following example sorts by a specified column using the session object's query() method:
rs = session.query(Files).order_by(Files.Size)
for instance in rs:
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("Name: ", instance.Name)
	print("---------")

You can also use the session object's execute() method perform an ORDER BY. For example:

rs = session.execute(Files_table.select().order_by(Files_table.c.Size))
for instance in rs:

GROUP BY

The following example uses the session object's query() method to group records with a specified column:
rs = session.query(func.count(Files.Id).label("CustomCount"), Files.Id).group_by(Files.Id)
for instance in rs:
	print("Count: ", instance.CustomCount)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("---------")

You can also use the session object's execute() method to perform a GROUP BY:

rs = session.execute(Files_table.select().with_only_columns([func.count(Files_table.c.Id).label("CustomCount"), Files_table.c.Id]).group_by(Files_table.c.Id))
for instance in rs:

LIMIT and OFFSET

The following example uses the session object's query() method to skip the first 100 records and fetch the following 25:
rs = session.query(Files).limit(25).offset(100)
for instance in rs:
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("Name: ", instance.Name)
	print("---------")

You can also use the session object's execute() method to set a LIMIT or OFFSET:

rs = session.execute(Files_table.select().limit(25).offset(100))
for instance in rs:

CData Python Connector for Box

Aggregate Functions

Certain aggregate functions can also be used within SQLAlchemy by using the func module.

To import this module, execute:

from sqlalchemy.sql import func

Once func is imported, the following aggregate functions are available:

COUNT

The following example counts the number of records in a set of groups using the session object's query() method.
rs = session.query(func.count(Files.Id).label("CustomCount"), Files.Id).group_by(Files.Id)
for instance in rs:
	print("Count: ", instance.CustomCount)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("---------")

You can also execute COUNT using the session object's execute() method:

rs = session.execute(Files_table.select().with_only_columns([func.count(Files_table.c.Id).label("CustomCount"), Files_table.c.Id])group_by(Files_table.c.Id))
for instance in rs:

SUM

This example calculates the cumulative amount of a numeric column in a set of groups.

rs = session.query(func.sum(Files.Size).label("CustomSum"), Files.Id).group_by(Files.Id)
for instance in rs:
	print("Sum: ", instance.CustomSum)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("---------")

You can also invoke SUM using the session object's execute() method.

rs = session.execute(Files_table.select().with_only_columns([func.sum(Files_table.c.Size).label("CustomSum"), Files_table.c.Id]).group_by(Files_table.c.Id))
for instance in rs:

AVG

This example uses the session object's query() method to calculate the average amount of a numeric column in a set of groups:
rs = session.query(func.avg(Files.Size).label("CustomAvg"), Files.Id).group_by(Files.Id)
for instance in rs:
	print("Avg: ", instance.CustomAvg)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("---------")

You can also use the session object's execute() method to invoke AVG:

rs = session.execute(Files_table.select().with_only_columns([func.avg(Files_table.c.Size).label("CustomAvg"), Files_table.c.Id]).group_by(Files_table.c.Id))
for instance in rs:

MAX and MIN

This example finds the maximum value and minimum value of a numeric column in a set of groups.
rs = session.query(func.max(Files.Size).label("CustomMax"), func.min(Files.Size).label("CustomMin"), Files.Id).group_by(Files.Id)
for instance in rs:
	print("Max: ", instance.CustomMax)
	print("Min: ", instance.CustomMin)
	print("Id: ", instance.Id)
	print("---------")

You can also use the session object's execute() method to invoke MAX and MIN:

rs = session.execute(Files_table.select().with_only_columns([func.max(Files_table.c.Size).label("CustomMax"), func.min(Files_table.c.Size).label("CustomMin"), Files_table.c.Id]).group_by(Files_table.c.Id))
for instance in rs:

CData Python Connector for Box

Modifying Data

Commands can be executed individually by the session with a call to "execute()".

Obtaining the Table Object

The query supplied to this method is constructed using the associated Table object of a mapped class. This Table object is obtained from the mapped class's metadata field, as below:

Files_table = Files.metadata.tables["Files"]

Once the table object is obtained, the write operations are executed in the following ways. The queries are executed immediately without the need for a call to "commit()":

Insert

The following example adds a new record to the table:

session.execute(Files_table.insert(), {"Id": "Sunset", "Name": "Sunset"})

Update

The following example modifies an existing record in the table:

session.execute(Files_table.update().where(Files_table.c.Id == "123").values(Id="Sunset", Name="Sunset"))

Delete

The following example removes an existing record from the table:

session.execute(Files_table.delete().where(Files_table.c.Id == "123"))

CData Python Connector for Box

From Pandas

When combined with the connector, Pandas can be used to generate data frames that contain your Box data. Once created, a data frame can be passed to various other Python packages.

Connecting

Pandas relies on an SQLAlchemy engine to execute queries. Before you can use Pandas you must import it:
import pandas as pd
from sqlalchemy import create_engine
engine = create_engine("box:///?InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")

Querying Data

In Pandas, SELECT queries are provided in a call to the read_sql() method, alongside a relevant connection object. Pandas executes the query on that connection, and returns the results in the form of a data frame, which can be used for a variety of purposes.
df = pd.read_sql("""
	SELECT
	   Id,
	   Name,
     $exNumericCol;
	FROM Files;""", engine)
print(df)

Modifying Data

To insert new records into a table, create a new data frame, and define its fields accordingly. When that is done, call to_sql() on the data frame to perform the INSERT operation with the connector, as shown in the example below. You must set the "if _exists" argument to "append" to prevent Pandas from attempting building the table from scratch. To prevent Pandas from writing the data frame index as a column, set index=False.
df = pd.DataFrame({"Id": ["Sunset"], "Name": ["Sunset"]})
df.to_sql("Files", con=engine, if_exists="append", index=False)

CData Python Connector for Box

From Matplotlib

Matplotlib contains a number of tools that can graphically model Box data after being fed a data frame From Pandas.

Using PyPlot

Before any Matplotlib tool, such as pyplot, can be used, it must be imported:
from matplotlib import pyplot as plt

Once a Pandas data frame is obtained, it can be used to create a plot visualizing Box data. For example, the following plot generates and displays a bar graph relating Id and Size values:

df.plot(kind="bar", x="Id", y=["Size"])
plt.show()

CData Python Connector for Box

From Petl

The connector can be used to create ETL applications and pipelines for CSV data in Python using Petl.

Install Required Modules

Install the Petl modules using the pip utility.
pip install petl

Connecting

After you import the modules, including the CData Python Connector for Box, you can use the connector's connect function to create a connection using a valid Box connection string. If you prefer not to use a direct connection, you can use a SQLAlchemy engine.
import petl as etl
import cdata.box as mod
cnxn = mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")

Extract, Transform, and Load the Box Data

Create a SQL query string and store the query results in a DataFrame.
sql = "SELECT	Id, Name FROM Files "
table1 = etl.fromdb(cnxn,sql)

Loading Data

With the query results stored in a DataFrame, you can load your data into any supported Petl destination. The following example loads the data into a CSV file.
etl.tocsv(table1,'output.csv')

Modifying Data

Insert new rows into Box tables using Petl's appenddb function.
table1 = [['Id','Name'],['Sunset','Sunset']]
etl.appenddb(table1,cnxn,'Files')

CData Python Connector for Box

Schema Discovery

The extension supports schema discovery by using SQL queries to available System Tables.

Using SQL

The following sections describe the discovery of metadata through several System Tables:

CData Python Connector for Box

Tables and Views

The connector possesses system tables that are used to discover the tables and views available in the data model. Of these system tables, "sys_tables" and "sys_views" are used to fetch information about the available tables and views respectively:

Tables


import cdata.box as mod
conn = mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")
cur = conn.cursor()
cmd = "SELECT * FROM sys_tables"
cur.execute(cmd)
rs = cur.fetchall()
for row in rs:
	print(row)

Views


import cdata.box as mod
conn = mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")
cur = conn.cursor()
cmd = "SELECT * FROM sys_views"
cur.execute(cmd, params)
rs = cur.fetchall()
for row in rs:
	print(row)

CData Python Connector for Box

Columns

The available columns for any given table are fetched from a system table called "sys_tablecolumns". A specific table name is provided in the WHERE criteria to restrict the table from which the column information is fetched:

import cdata.box as mod
conn = mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")
cur = conn.cursor()
cmd = "SELECT * FROM sys_tablecolumns WHERE TableName = 'Files'"
cur.execute(cmd)
rs = cur.fetchall()
for row in rs:
	print(row)

CData Python Connector for Box

Procedures

Procedures

A system table called "sys_procedures" is queried to obtain the available stored procedures that are executed:
import cdata.box as mod
conn = mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")
cur = conn.cursor()
cmd = "SELECT * FROM sys_procedures"
cur.execute(cmd)
rs = cur.fetchall()
for row in rs:
	print(row)

Parameters

The input parameters of any stored procedure are similarly obtained from the "sys_procedureparameters" system table:
import cdata.box as mod
conn = mod.connect("InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;")
cur = conn.cursor()
cmd = "SELECT * FROM sys_procedureparameters WHERE ProcedureName = 'UploadFile'"
cur.execute(cmd)
rs = cur.fetchall()
for row in rs:
	print(row)

CData Python Connector for Box

Advanced Features

This section details a selection of advanced features of the Box connector.

User Defined Views

The connector supports the use of user defined views, virtual tables whose contents are decided by a pre-configured user defined query. These views are useful when you cannot directly control queries being issued to the drivers. For an overview of creating and configuring custom views, see User Defined Views .

SSL Configuration

Use SSL Configuration to adjust how connector handles TLS/SSL certificate negotiations. You can choose from various certificate formats;. For further information, see the SSLServerCert property under "Connection String Options" .

Firewall and Proxy

Configure the connector for compliance with Firewall and Proxy, including Windows proxies and HTTP proxies. You can also set up tunnel connections.

Caching Data

Caching Data enables faster access to data and reduces the number of API calls, improving performance. The connector supports a simple caching model where multiple connections can also share the cache over time. When configuring the cache connection, you can specify automatic or explicit data caching.

Query Processing

The connector offloads as much of the SELECT statement processing as possible to Box and then processes the rest of the query in memory (client-side).

For further information, see Query Processing.

Logging

For an overview of configuration settings that can be used to refine CData logging, see Logging. Only two connection properties are required for basic logging, but there are numerous features that support more refined logging, which enables you to use the LogModules connection property to specify subsets of information to be logged.

Exception Handling

For an overview of how exceptions are reported and the components of an exception, see Exception Handling.

CData Python Connector for Box

User Defined Views

The CData Python Connector for Box supports the use of user defined views: user-defined virtual tables whose contents are decided by a preconfigured query. User defined views are useful in situations where you cannot directly control the query being issued to the driver; for example, when using the driver from a tool.

Use a user defined view to define predicates that are always applied. If you specify additional predicates in the query to the view, they are combined with the query already defined as part of the view.

There are two ways to create user defined views:

  • Create a JSON-formatted configuration file defining the views you want.
  • DDL statements.

Defining Views Using a Configuration File

User defined views are defined in a JSON-formatted configuration file called UserDefinedViews.json. The connector automatically detects the views specified in this file.

You can also have multiple view definitions and control them using the UserDefinedViews connection property. When you use this property, only the specified views are seen by the connector.

This user defined view configuration file is formatted so that each root element defines the name of a view, and includes a child element, called query, which contains the custom SQL query for the view.

For example:

{
	"MyView": {
		"query": "SELECT * FROM Files WHERE MyColumn = 'value'"
	},
	"MyView2": {
		"query": "SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE Id IN (1,2,3)"
	}
}
Use the UserDefinedViews connection property to specify the location of your JSON configuration file. For example:
"UserDefinedViews", "C:\\Users\\yourusername\\Desktop\\tmp\\UserDefinedViews.json"

Defining Views Using DDL Statements

The connector is also capable of creating and altering the schema via DDL Statements such as CREATE LOCAL VIEW, ALTER LOCAL VIEW, and DROP LOCAL VIEW.

Create a View

To create a new view using DDL statements, provide the view name and query as follows:

CREATE LOCAL VIEW [MyViewName] AS SELECT * FROM Customers LIMIT 20;

If no JSON file exists, the above code creates one. The view is then created in the JSON configuration file and is now discoverable. The JSON file location is specified by the UserDefinedViews connection property.

Alter a View

To alter an existing view, provide the name of an existing view alongside the new query you would like to use instead:

ALTER LOCAL VIEW [MyViewName] AS SELECT * FROM Customers WHERE TimeModified > '3/1/2020';

The view is then updated in the JSON configuration file.

Drop a View

To drop an existing view, provide the name of an existing schema alongside the new query you would like to use instead.

DROP LOCAL VIEW [MyViewName]

This removes the view from the JSON configuration file. It can no longer be queried.

Schema for User Defined Views

In order to avoid a view's name clashing with an actual entity in the data model, user defined views are exposed in the UserViews schema by default. To change the name of the schema used for UserViews, reset the UserViewsSchemaName property.

Working with User Defined Views

For example, a SQL statement with a user defined view called UserViews.RCustomers only lists customers in Raleigh:
SELECT * FROM Customers WHERE City = 'Raleigh';
An example of a query to the driver:
SELECT * FROM UserViews.RCustomers WHERE Status = 'Active';
Resulting in the effective query to the source:
SELECT * FROM Customers WHERE City = 'Raleigh' AND Status = 'Active';
That is a very simple example of a query to a user defined view that is effectively a combination of the view query and the view definition. It is possible to compose these queries in much more complex patterns. All SQL operations are allowed in both queries and are combined when appropriate.

CData Python Connector for Box

SSL Configuration

Customizing the SSL Configuration

By default, the connector attempts to negotiate TLS with the server. The server certificate is validated against the default system trusted certificate store. You can override how the certificate gets validated using the SSLServerCert connection property.

To specify another certificate, see the SSLServerCert connection property.

CData Python Connector for Box

Firewall and Proxy

Connecting Through a Firewall or Proxy

HTTP Proxies

Note: The connector uses the system proxy settings by default, without further configuration needed. If you want to connect to other proxies, set ProxyAutoDetect to False and read further.

To authenticate to an HTTP proxy, set the following:

  • ProxyServer: the hostname or IP address of the proxy server that you want to route HTTP traffic through.
  • ProxyPort: the TCP port that the proxy server is running on.
  • ProxyAuthScheme: the authentication method the connector uses when authenticating to the proxy server.
  • ProxyUser: the username of a user account registered with the proxy server.
  • ProxyPassword: the password associated with the ProxyUser.

Other Proxies

Set the following properties:

CData Python Connector for Box

Caching Data

Caching Data

Caching data provides several benefits, including faster access to data and reducing the number of API calls, which improve performance. The connector supports a simple caching model where multiple connections can also share the cache over time. You can enable and configure caching features by setting the necessary connection properties.

Contents

The sections in this chapter detail the connector's caching functionality and link to the corresponding connection properties, as well as SQL statements.

Configuring the Cache Connection

Configuring the Cache Connection describes the properties that you can set when configuring the cache database.

Caching Metadata

Caching Metadata describes the CacheMetadata property. This property determines whether or not to cache the table metadata to a file store.

Automatically Caching Data

Automatically Caching Data describes how the connector automatically refreshes the cache when the AutoCache property is set.

Explicitly Caching Data

Explicitly Caching Data describes how you can decide what data is stored in the cache and when it is updated.

Data Type Mapping

Data Type Mapping shows the mappings between the data types configured in the schema and the data types in the database.

CData Python Connector for Box

Configuring the Cache Connection

Configuring the Caching Database

This section describes the properties for caching data to the persistent store of your choice.

CacheLocation

The CacheLocation property species the path to a file-system-based database. When caching is enabled, a file-system-based database is used by default. If CacheLocation is not specified, this database is stored at the path in Location. If neither of these connection properties are specified, the connector uses a platform-dependent default location.

CacheConnection

The CacheConnection property specifies a database driver and the connection string to the caching database.

CacheDriver and CacheProvider

Both the CacheDriver and CacheProvider properties are supported. Each specifies a database driver and the connection string to the caching database. CacheDriver is designed for Linux and MacOS; CacheProvider is Windows-based.

CData Python Connector for Box

Caching Metadata

This section describes how to enable caching metadata and how to update the metadata cache.

Before being able to query data, the connector requires relevant metadata to be retrieved. By default, metadata is cached in memory and shared across connections. But if you want to persist across processes, or if metadata requests are expensive, the solution is to cache the metadata to disk.

Enable Caching Metadata

To enable caching of metadata, set CacheMetadata = true and see Configuring the Cache Connection for instructions on how to configure your connection string. The connector caches the metadata the first time it is needed and uses the metadata cache for subsequent requests.

Update the Metadata Cache

Because metadata is cached, changes to metadata on the live source, for example, adding or removing a column or attribute, are not automatically reflected in the metadata cache. To get updates to the live metadata, you need to delete or drop the cached data.

CData Python Connector for Box

Automatically Caching Data

Automatically caching data is useful when you do not want to rebuild the cache for each query. When you query data for the first time, the connector automatically initializes and builds a cache in the background. When AutoCache = true, the connector uses the cache for subsequent query executions, resulting in faster response times.

Configuring Automatic Caching

Caching the Files Table

The following example caches the Files table in the file specified by the CacheLocation property of the connection string.

SELECT Id, Name FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'

Common Use Case

A common use for automatically caching data is to improve driver performance when making repeated requests to a live data source, such as building a report or creating a visualization. With auto caching enabled, repeated requests to the same data may be executed in a short period of time, but within an allowable tolerance (CacheTolerance) of what is considered "live" data.

CData Python Connector for Box

Explicitly Caching Data

With explicit caching (AutoCache = false), you decide exactly what data is cached and when to query the cache instead of the live data. Explicit caching gives you full control over the cache contents by using CACHE Statements. This section describes some strategies to use the caching features offered by the connector.

Creating the Cache

To load data in the cache, issue the following statement.

CACHE SELECT * FROM tableName WHERE ...

Once the statement is issued, any matching data in tableName is loaded into the corresponding table.

Updating the Cache

This section describes two ways to update the cache.

Updating with the SELECT Statement

The following example shows a statement that can update modified rows and add missing rows in the cached table. However, this statement does not delete extra rows that are already in the cache. This statement only merges the new rows or updates the existing rows.

CACHE SELECT * FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'

Updating with the TRUNCATE Statement

The following example shows a statement that can update modified rows and add missing rows in the cached table. This statement can also delete rows in the cache table that are not present in the live data source.

  CACHE WITH TRUNCATE SELECT * FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'
  

Query the Data in Online or Offline Mode

This section describes how to query the data in online or offline mode.

Online: Select Cached Tables

You can use the tableName#CACHE syntax to explicitly execute queries to the cache while still online, as shown in the following example.

SELECT * FROM Files#CACHE

Offline: Select Cached Tables

With Offline = true, SELECT statements always execute against the local cache database, regardless of whether you explicitly specify the cached table or not. Modification of the cache is disabled in Offline mode to prevent accidentally updating only the cached data. Executing a DELETE/UPDATE/INSERT statement while in Offline mode results in an exception.

The following example selects from the local cache but not the live data source because Offline = true.

SELECT * FROM Files WHERE Id='123' ORDER BY Name ASC

Delete Data from the Cache

You can delete data from the cache by building a direct connection to the database. Note that the connector does not support manually deleting data from the cache.

Common Use Case

A common use for caching is to have an application always query the cached data and only update the cache at set intervals, such as once every day or every two hours. There are two ways in which this can be implemented:

  • AutoCache = false and Offline = false. All queries issued by the application explicitly reference the tableName#CACHE table. When the cache needs to be updated, the application executes a tableName#CACHE ... statement to bring the cached data up to date.
  • Offline = true. Caching is transparent to the application. All queries are executed against the table as normal, so most application code does not need to be aware that caching is done. To update the cached data, simply create a separate connection with Offline = false and execute a tableName#CACHE ... statement.

CData Python Connector for Box

Data Type Mapping

The connector maps types from the data source to the corresponding data type available in the chosen cache database. The following table shows the mappings between the data types configured in the schema and the data types in the database. Some schema types have synonyms which are all listed in the Schema column.

Data Type Mapping

Note: String columns can map to different data types depending on their length.

Schema .NET JDBC SQL Server Derby MySQL Oracle SQLite Access
int, integer, int32 Int32 int int INTEGER INT NUMBER integer LONG
smallint, short, int16 Int16 short smallint SMALLINT SMALLINT NUMBER integer SHORT
double, float, real Double double float DOUBLE DOUBLE NUMBER double DOUBLE
date DateTime java.sql.Date date DATE DATE DATE date DATETIME
datetime, timestamp DateTime java.sql.Date datetime TIMESTAMP DATETIME TIMESTAMP datetime DATETIME
time, timespan TimeSpan java.sql.Time time TIME TIME TIMESTAMP datetime DATETIME
string, varchar String java.lang.String If length > 4000: nvarchar(max), Otherwise: nvarchar(length)If length > 32672: LONG VARCHAR, Otherwise VARCHAR(length)If length > 255: LONGTEXT, Otherwise: VARCHAR(length)If length > 4000: CLOB, Otherwise: VARCHAR2(length)nvarchar(length)If length > 255: LONGTEXT, Otherwise: VARCHAR(length)
long, int64, bigint Int64 long bigint BIGINT BIGINT NUMBER bigint LONG
boolean, bool Boolean boolean tinyint SMALLINT BIT NUMBER tinyint BIT
decimal, numeric Decimal java.math.BigDecimal decimal DECIMAL DECIMAL DECIMAL decimal CURRENCY
uuid Guid java.util.UUID nvarchar(length) VARCHAR(length)VARCHAR(length) VARCHAR2(length)nvarchar(length) VARCHAR(length)
binary, varbinary, longvarbinary byte[] byte[] binary(1000) or varbinary(max) after SQL Server 2000, image otherwise BLOB LONGBLOB BLOB BLOB LONGBINARY

CData Python Connector for Box

Query Processing

Query Processing

CData has a client-side SQL engine built into the connector library. This enables support for the full capabilities that SQL-92 offers, including filters, aggregations, functions, etc.

For sources that do not support SQL-92, the connector offloads as much of SQL statement processing as possible to Box and then processes the rest of the query in memory (client-side). This results in optimal performance.

For data sources with limited query capabilities, the connector handles transformations of the SQL query to make it simpler for the connector. The goal is to make smart decisions based on the query capabilities of the data source to push down as much of the computation as possible. The Box Query Evaluation component examines SQL queries and returns information indicating what parts of the query the connector is not capable of executing natively.

The Box Query Slicer component is used in more specific cases to separate a single query into multiple independent queries. The client-side Query Engine makes decisions about simplifying queries, breaking queries into multiple queries, and pushing down or computing aggregations on the client-side while minimizing the size of the result set.

There's a significant trade-off in evaluating queries, even partially, client-side. There are always queries that are impossible to execute efficiently in this model, and some can be particularly expensive to compute in this manner. CData always pushes down as much of the query as is feasible for the data source to generate the most efficient query possible and provide the most flexible query capabilities.

More Information

For a full discussion of how CData handles query processing, see CData Architecture: Query Execution.

CData Python Connector for Box

Logging

Logging

Capturing connector logging can be very helpful when diagnosing error messages or other unexpected behavior.

Basic Logging

To begin capturing connector logging, set these properties:

  • Logfile: A filepath that designates the name and location of the log file.
  • Verbosity: A numerical value (1-5) that determines the amount of detail in the log. See the page in the Connection Properties section for an explanation of the five levels.
  • MaxLogFileSize: When the limit is hit, a new log is created in the same folder with the date and time appended to the end. The default limit is 100 MB. Values lower than 100 kB will use 100 kB as the value instead.
  • MaxLogFileCount: A string specifying the maximum file count of log files. When the limit is hit, a new log is created in the same folder with the date and time appended to the end and the oldest log file will be deleted. Minimum supported value is 2. A value of 0 or a negative value indicates no limit on the count.

Once these properties are set, the connector populates the log file as it carries out various tasks, such as when authentication is performed or queries are executed. If the specified file doesn't already exist, it is created.

Log Verbosity

The verbosity level determines the amount of detail that the connector reports to the Logfile. Supported Verbosity levels range from 1 to 5.

The following list describes each level:

1Setting Verbosity to 1 logs the query, the number of rows returned by it, the start of execution and the time taken, and any errors.
2Setting Verbosity to 2 logs everything included in Verbosity 1, cache queries, and additional information about the request.
3Setting Verbosity to 3 also logs HTTP headers, as well as the body of the request and the response.
4Setting Verbosity to 4 also logs transport-level communication with the data source. This includes SSL negotiation.
5Setting Verbosity to 5 also logs communication with the data source and additional details that may be helpful in troubleshooting problems. This includes interface commands.

For normal operations, Verbosity should not be set to greater than 1. At higher verbosities you can log substantial amounts of data, which can delay execution times.

To refine the logged content further by showing/hiding specific categories of information, see LogModules.

Sensitive Data

Verbosity levels of 3 and higher may capture information that you do not want shared outside of your organization. The following lists information of concern for each level:

  • Verbosity 3: The full body of the request and the response, which includes all the data returned by the connector
  • Verbosity 4: SSL certificates
  • Verbosity 5: Any extra transfer data not included at Verbosity 3, such as non human-readable binary transfer data

Note: Although we mask sensitive values, such as passwords, in the connection string and any request in the log, it is always best practice to review the logs for any sensitive information before sharing outside your organization.

Advanced Logging

You may want to refine the exact information that is recorded to the log file. This can be accomplished using the LogModules property. This property allows you to filter the logging using a semicolon-separated list of logging modules.

Example property value:

LogModules=INFO;EXEC;SSL;SQL;META;

Note that the logfile filtering triggered by the Verbosity connection property takes precedence over the filtering imposed by this connection property. This means that operations of a higher verbosity level than the level specified in the Verbosity connection property are not printed in the logfile, even if they belong to one of the modules specified in this connection property.

The available modules and submodules are:

Module Name Module Description Submodules
INFO General Information. Includes the connection string, product version (build number), and initial connection messages.
  • Connec – Information related to creating or destroying connections.
  • Messag – Generic label for messages pertaining to connections, the connection string, and product version. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
EXEC Query Execution. Includes execution messages for user-written SQL queries, parsed SQL queries, and normalized SQL queries. Success/failure messages for queries and query pages appear here as well.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to query execution. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • Normlz – Query normalization steps. Query normalization is when the product takes the user-submitted query and rewrites the query to get the same results with optimal performance.
  • Origin – This label applies to any messages recording a user's original query (the exact, unaltered, non-normalized query executed by the user).
  • Page – Messages related to query paging.
  • Parsed – Query parsing steps. Parsing is the process of converting the user-submitted query into a standardized format for easier processing.
HTTP HTTP protocol messages. Includes HTTP requests/responses (including POST messages), as well as Kerberos related messages.
  • KERB – HTTP requests related to Kerberos.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to HTTP protocols. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • Unpack – This label applies to messages about zipped data being returned from the service API and unpacked by the product.
  • Res – Messages containing HTTP responses.
  • Req – Messages containing HTTP requests.
WSDL Messages pertaining to the generation of WSDL/XSD files.
SSL SSL certificate messages.
  • Certif – Messages pertaining to SSL certificates.
AUTH Authentication related failure/success messages.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to authentication. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • OAuth – Messages related to OAuth authentication.
  • Krbros – Kerberos-related authentication messages.
SQL Includes SQL transactions, SQL bulk transfer messages, and SQL result set messages.
  • Bulk – Messages pertaining to bulk query execution.
  • Cache – Messages related to reading row data from and writing row data to the product's cache for better performance.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to SQL transactions. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • ResSet – Query resultsets.
  • Transc – Messages related to handling transactions, including information about the number of jobs executed and backup table handling.
META Metadata cache and schema messages.
  • Cache – Messages related to reading from and modifying column and table definitions in the product's cache for better performance.
  • Schema – Messages related to retrieving metadata from or modifying the service schema.
  • MemSto – Messages related to writing to or reading from in-memory metadata cache.
  • Storag – Messages relating to storing metadata on disk or in an external data store, rather than in memory.
FUNC Information related to executing SQL functions.
  • Errmsg – Error messages related to executing SQL functions.
TCP Incoming and outgoing raw bytes on TCP transport layer messages.
  • Send – Raw data sent via the TCP protocol.
  • Receiv – Raw data received via the TCP protocol.
FTP Messages pertaining to the File Transfer Protocol.
  • Info – Status messages related to communication in the FTP protocol.
  • Client – Messages related to actions taken by the FTP client (the product) during FTP communication.
  • Server – Messages related to actions taken by the FTP server during FTP communication.
SFTP Messages pertaining to the Secure File Transfer Protocol.
  • Info – Status messages related to communication in the SFTP protocol.
  • To_Server – Messages related to actions taken by the SFTP client (the product) during SFTP communication.
  • From_Server – Messages related to actions taken by the SFTP server during SFTP communication.
POP Messages pertaining to data transferred via the Post Office Protocol.
  • Client – Messages related to actions taken by the POP client (the product) during POP communication.
  • Server – Messages related to actions taken by the POP server during POP communication.
  • Status – Status messages related to communication in the POP protocol.
SMTP Messages pertaining to data transferred via the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
  • Client – Messages related to actions taken by the SMTP client (the product) during SMTP communication.
  • Server – Messages related to actions taken by the SMTP server during SMTP communication.
  • Status – Status messages related to communication in the SMTP protocol.
CORE Messages relating to various internal product operations not covered by other modules.
DEMN Messages related to SQL remoting.
CLJB Messages about bulk data uploads (cloud job).
  • Commit – Submissions for bulk data uploads.
SRCE Miscellaneous messages produced by the product that don't belong in any other module.
TRANCE Advanced messages concerning low-level product operations.

CData Python Connector for Box

Exception Handling

Exception Handling

Exceptions can be surfaced from either the API or the CData Python Connector for Box. Each exception will have an error code, an error message, and a SQL state.

Error Codes

The error code classifies the type of error.

0 NONE Used for unclassified errors and internally handled errors. This code also covers data source-specific errors that do not fit in any specific category.
65537 TCP_UNKNOWN_HOST Unable to resolve a hostname (DNS failure).
65538 TCP_CONNECTION_REFUSED Could not connect to the remote port.
65539 TCP_AUTH_FAILED Login failed when using a binary authentication protocol. Use this for auth errors when the protocol is not HTTP (LDAP, SASL, Kerberos, ...).
65540 TCP_TIMEOUT Did not receive a response after sending a request to the server.
65541 TCP_PROTOCOL For wire protocol drivers. Either the server sent a bad packet that we are unable to process, or we cannot construct a packet to send.
131073 TLS_SERVER_UNTRUSTED Could not verify SSL server certificate.
131074 TLS_CLIENT_UNTRUSTED Server did not accept the client certificate we sent.
196609 OAUTH_DECRYPT_FAILED OAuthEncryptKey did not decrypt the OAuthSettings file.
196610 OAUTH_MISSING_CLIENT_INFO OAuthClientId / OAuthClientSecret / OAuthJWTCert is missing.
196611 OAUTH_MISSING_PROP General OAuth property missing. OAUTH_MISSING_CLIENT_INFO is used for missing client ID/secret and JWT cert.
196612 OAUTH_NO_ACCESS_TOKEN Unable to retrieve access token. Only use this when getting a token in GetOAuthAccessToken / RefreshOAuthAccessToken.
196613 OAUTH_TOKEN_EXPIRED The access token expired. Normally used with a RefreshOAuth/OAuthException behavior.
196614 OAUTH_INVALID_PROP OAuth property has an invalid value. OAUTH_MISSING_CLIENT_INFO / OAUTH_MISSING_PROP is used if the value is not set.
262145 HTTP_REQUEST_TIMEOUT Did not receive a response from the HTTP server.
262146 HTTP_CLIENT_ERROR Generic HTTP 4xx error. Only use for 4xx errors not covered by other codes.
262147 HTTP_AUTH_FAILED HTTP 401 error.
262148 HTTP_LIMIT_EXCEEDED HTTP 429 error.
262149 HTTP_SERVER_ERROR HTTP 5xx error.
262150 HTTP_NOT_FOUND_ERROR HTTP 404 error.
327681 CORE_TIMEOUT General timeout. Not related to a specific network request.
327682 CORE_OP_NOT_ALLOWED Operation blocked by provider permissions.
327683 CORE_CONNECTION_CONFIG Connection configuration is not valid.
327684 CORE_SERIALIZE Failed to encode data into a specific format (XML, JSON, CSV, ...).
327685 CORE_DESERIALIZE Failed to decode data from a specific format (XML, JSON, CSV, ...).
393217 SQL_SYNTAX_ERROR Unable to parse a SQL query.
393218 SQL_MISSING_COLUMNS Query did not include required columns.
393219 SQL_MISSING_PARAMS Stored procedure call did not include required parameters.
393220 SQL_QUERY_NOT_SUPPORTED A part of the query is not allowed in the current context.
458753 SSH_SERVER_UNTRUSTED Could not verify SSH server.
524289 STORAGE_LIST_EXCEPTION Issue listing storage resources.
524290 STORAGE_RESOURCE_NOT_FOUND Issue finding storage resources.
524291 STORAGE_ROOT_RESOURCE_NOT_FOUND The root resource (bucket/share/drive) was not found; cannot create it in flat file drivers.
524292 STORAGE_RESOURCE_NOT_A_DIRECTORY Storage resource is not a directory.
524293 STORAGE_RESOURCE_NOT_A_FILE Storage resource is not a file.
524294 STORAGE_PERMISSIONS_DENIED Storage permissions denied.

SQL State

The SQL state is used when throwing generic provider errors to the wrapper and indicates the success or failure of a call.

Some of the common SQL states are listed below:

07007 REQUIRED_CLAUSE Class Code 07: Dynamic SQL Error.
08001 OPEN_CONNECTION Class Code 08: Connection Exception. The connection was unable to be established to the application server or other server.
08004 REJECT_CONNECTION The application server rejected establishment of the connection.
42501 PRIVILEGE_IDENTIFIED_OBJECT Class Code 42: Syntax Error or Access Rule Violation. The authorization ID does not have the privilege to perform the specified operation on the identified object.
42506 AUTH_FAILED Owner authorization failure occurred.
42601 SQL_SYNTAX A character, token, or clause is invalid or missing.

Error Message

The error message provides more detailed reasoning about why the error occurred. It provides an explanation of the issue, and may include steps on how to resolve it.

CData Python Connector for Box

SQL Compliance

The CData Python Connector for Box supports several operations on data, including querying, deleting, modifying, and inserting.

SELECT Statements

See SELECT Statements for a syntax reference and examples.

See Data Model for information on the capabilities of the Box API.

INSERT Statements

See INSERT Statements for a syntax reference and examples, as well as retrieving the new records' Ids.

UPDATE Statements

The primary key Id is required to update a record. See UPDATE Statements for a syntax reference and examples.

DELETE Statements

The primary key Id is required to delete a record. See DELETE Statements for a syntax reference and examples.

CACHE Statements

CACHE statements allow granular control over the connector's caching functionality. For a syntax reference and examples, see CACHE Statements.

For more information on the caching feature, see Caching Data.

EXECUTE Statements

Use EXECUTE or EXEC statements to execute stored procedures. See EXECUTE Statements for a syntax reference and examples.

Names and Quoting

  • Table and column names are considered identifier names; as such, they are restricted to the following characters: [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _:@].
  • To use a table or column name with characters not listed above, the name must be quoted using square brackets ([name]) in any SQL statement.
  • Parameter names can optionally start with the @ symbol (e.g., @p1 or @CustomerName) and cannot be quoted.
  • Strings must be quoted using single quotes (e.g., 'John Doe').

CData Python Connector for Box

SQL Functions

The connector provides functions that are similar to those that are available with most standard databases. These functions are implemented in the CData provider engine and thus are available across all data sources with the same consistent API. Three categories of functions are available: string, date, and math.

The connector interprets all SQL function inputs as either strings or column identifiers, so you need to escape all literals as strings, with single quotes. For example, contrast the SQL Server syntax and connector syntax for the DATENAME function:

  • SQL Server:
    SELECT DATENAME(yy,GETDATE())
  • connector:
    SELECT DATENAME('yy',GETDATE())

String Functions

These functions perform string manipulations and return a string value. See STRING Functions for more details.

Date Functions

These functions perform date and date time manipulations. See DATE Functions for more details.

Math Functions

These functions provide mathematical operations. See MATH Functions for more details.

CData Python Connector for Box

STRING Functions

ASCII(character_expression)

Returns the ASCII code value of the left-most character of the character expression.

  • character_expression: The character expression.

                      SELECT ASCII('0');
                      --  Result: 48
                    

BASE64_ENCODE(input_binary)

Returns the Base64-encoded string form of a binary input.

  • input_binary: The binary value to encode.

                        SELECT BASE64_ENCODE(BinaryData);
                    -- Result: 'QmFzZTY0RW5jb2RlZA=='
                    

BASE64_DECODE(input_string)

Returns the binary result of decoding a Base64-encoded string.

  • input_string: The Base64-encoded string.

                        SELECT BASE64_DECODE('QmFzZTY0RW5jb2RlZA==');
                    -- Result: (binary output)
                    

CHAR(integer_expression)

Converts the integer ASCII code to the corresponding character.

  • integer_expression: The integer from 0 through 255.

                      SELECT CHAR(48);
                      -- Result: '0'
                    

CHARINDEX(expressionToFind ,expressionToSearch [,start_location ])

Returns the starting position of the specified expression in the character string.

  • expressionToFind: The character expression to find.
  • expressionToSearch: The character expression, typically a column, to search.
  • start_location: An optional character position to start searching for expressionToFind in expressionToSearch.

                      SELECT CHARINDEX('456', '0123456');
                      -- Result: 4

                      SELECT CHARINDEX('456', '0123456', 5);
                      -- Result: -1
                    

CHAR_LENGTH(character_expression),

Returns the number of UTF-8 characters present in the expression.

  • character_expression: The set of characters to be evaluated for length.

				 SELECT CHAR_LENGTH('sample text') FROM Account LIMIT 1
				 -- Result: 11			
				

CONCAT(string_value1, string_value2, ..., string_valueN)

Returns the string that is the concatenation of two or more string values.

  • string_value1: The first string to be concatenated.
  • string_value2: The second string to be concatenated.
  • string_valueN: (optional) Any additional strings to be concatenated.

                      SELECT CONCAT('Hello, ', 'world!');
                      -- Result: 'Hello, world!'
                    

CONTAINS(expressionToSearch, expressionToFind)

Returns 1 if expressionToFind is found within expressionToSearch; otherwise, 0.

  • expressionToSearch: The character expression, typically a column, to search.
  • expressionToFind: The character expression to find.

                      SELECT CONTAINS('0123456', '456');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT CONTAINS('0123456', 'Not a number');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

ENDSWITH(character_expression, character_suffix)

Returns 1 if character_expression ends with character_suffix; otherwise, 0.

  • character_expression: The character expression.
  • character_suffix: The character suffix to search for.

                      SELECT ENDSWITH('0123456', '456');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ENDSWITH('0123456', '012');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

FILESIZE(uri)

Returns the number of bytes present in the file at the specified file path.

  • uri: The path of the file from which to read the size.

				SELECT FILESIZE('C:/Users/User1/Desktop/myfile.txt');
				-- Result: 23684
				

FORMAT(value [, parseFormat], format )

Returns the value formatted with the specified format.

  • value: The string to format.
  • format: The string specifying the output syntax of the date or numeric format.
  • parseFormat: The string specifying the input syntax of the date value. Not applicable to numeric types.

                      SELECT FORMAT(12.34, '#');
                      -- Result: 12

                      SELECT FORMAT(12.34, '#.###');
                      -- Result: 12.34

                      SELECT FORMAT(1234, '0.000E0');
                      -- Result: 1.234E3
                      
                      SELECT FORMAT('2019/01/01', 'yyyy-MM-dd');
                      -- Result: 2019-01-01
                      
                      SELECT FORMAT('20190101', 'yyyyMMdd', 'yyyy-MM-dd');
                      -- Result: '2019-01-01'
                    

HASHBYTES(algorithm, value)

Returns the hash of the input value as a byte array using the given algorithm. The supported algorithms are MD5, SHA1, SHA2_256, SHA2_512, SHA3_224, SHA3_256, SHA3_384, and SHA3_512.

  • algorithm: The algorithm to use for hashing. Must be one of MD5, SHA1, SHA2_256, SHA2_512, SHA3_224, SHA3_256, SHA3_384, or SHA3_512.
  • value: The value to hash. Must be either a string or byte array.

                      SELECT HASHBYTES('MD5', 'Test');
                      -- Result (byte array): 0x0CBC6611F5540BD0809A388DC95A615B
                    

INDEXOF(expressionToSearch, expressionToFind [,start_location ])

Returns the starting position of the specified expression in the character string.

  • expressionToSearch: The character expression, typically a column, to search.
  • expressionToFind: The character expression to find.
  • start_location: An optional character position to start searching for expressionToFind in expressionToSearch.

                      SELECT INDEXOF('0123456', '456');
                      -- Result: 4

                      SELECT INDEXOF('0123456', '456', 5);
                      -- Result: -1
                    

ISALPHABETIC(character_expression)

Returns 1 if the character expression consists only of alphabetic characters; otherwise, 0.

  • character_expression: The string expression to evaluate.

                      SELECT ISALPHABETIC('Hello');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ISALPHABETIC('Hello123');
                      -- Result: 0

                      SELECT ISALPHABETIC('Hello!');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

ISALPHANUMERIC(character_expression)

Returns 1 if the character expression consists only of alphabetic and numeric characters; otherwise, 0.

  • character_expression: The string expression to evaluate.

                      SELECT ISALPHANUMERIC('Hello123');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ISALPHANUMERIC('123');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ISALPHANUMERIC('Hello.123');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

ISNUMERIC(character_expression)

Returns 1 if the character expression consists only of numeric digits and up to one decimal point; otherwise, 0.

  • character_expression: The string expression to evaluate.

                      SELECT ISNUMERIC('123');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ISNUMERIC('123.45');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ISNUMERIC('123.45.67');
                      -- Result: 0

                      SELECT ISNUMERIC('12a3');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

JSON_EXTRACT(json, jsonpath)

Selects any value in a JSON array or object. The path to the array is specified in the jsonpath argument. Return value is numeric or null.

  • json: The JSON document to extract.
  • jsonpath: The XPath used to select the nodes. The JSONPath must be a string constant. The values of the nodes selected will be returned in a token-separated list.

                      SELECT JSON_EXTRACT('{"test": {"data": 1}}', '$.test');
                      -- Result: '{"data":1}'

                      SELECT JSON_EXTRACT('{"test": {"data": 1}}', '$.test.data');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT JSON_EXTRACT('{"test": {"data": [1, 2, 3]}}', '$.test.data[1]');
                      -- Result: 2
                    

LEFT ( character_expression , integer_expression )

Returns the specified number of characters counting from the left of the specified string.

  • character_expression: The character expression.
  • integer_expression: The positive integer that specifies how many characters will be returned counting from the left of character_expression.

                      SELECT LEFT('1234567890', 3);
                      -- Result: '123'
                    

LEN(string_expression)

Returns the number of characters of the specified string expression.

  • string_expression: The string expression.

                      SELECT LEN('12345');
                      -- Result: 5
                    

LOCATE(substring,string)

Returns an integer representing how many characters into the string the substring appears.

  • substring: The substring to find inside larger string.
  • string: The larger string that is searched for the substring.
  • start locations: An optional integer that sets the character position (offset) from which to start searching.

				SELECT LOCATE('sample','XXXXXsampleXXXXX');
				-- Result: 6

                SELECT LOCATE('sample', 'XXXXXsampleXXXXX', 7)
                -- Result: 0
				

LOWER ( character_expression )

Returns the character expression with the uppercase character data converted to lowercase.

  • character_expression: The character expression.

                      SELECT LOWER('MIXED case');
                      -- Result: 'mixed case'
                    

LTRIM(character_expression)

Returns the character expression with leading blanks removed.

  • character_expression: The character expression.

                      SELECT LTRIM('     trimmed');
                      -- Result: 'trimmed'
                    

MASK(string_expression, mask_character [, start_index [, end_index ]])

Replaces the characters between start_index and end_index with the mask_character within the string.

  • string_expression: The string expression to be searched.
  • mask_character: The character to mask with.
  • start_index: The optional number of characters to leave unmasked at beginning of string. Defaults to 0.
  • end_index: The optional number of characters to leave unmasked at end of string. Defaults to 0.

                        SELECT MASK('1234567890','*',);
                        -- Result: '**********'
                        SELECT MASK('1234567890','*', 4);
                        -- Result: '1234******'
                        SELECT MASK('1234567890','*', 4, 2);
                        -- Result: '1234****90'  
                    

NCHAR(integer_expression)

Returns the Unicode character with the specified integer code as defined by the Unicode standard.

  • integer_expression: The integer from 0 through 65535 (0 through xFFFF).

OCTET_LENGTH(character_expression),

Returns the number of bytes present in the expression.

  • character_expression: The set of characters to be be evaluated.

				 SELECT OCTET_LENGTH('text') FROM Account LIMIT 1
				 -- Result: 4
				

PATINDEX(pattern, expression)

Returns the starting position of the first occurrence of the pattern in the expression. Returns 0 if the pattern is not found.

  • pattern: The character expression that contains the sequence to be found. The wild-card character % can be used only at the start or end of the expression.
  • expression: The expression, typically a column, to search for the pattern.

                      SELECT PATINDEX('123%', '1234567890');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT PATINDEX('%890', '1234567890');
                      -- Result: 8

                      SELECT PATINDEX('%456%', '1234567890');
                      -- Result: 4
                    

POSITION(expressionToFind IN expressionToSearch)

Returns the starting position of the specified expression in the character string.

  • expressionToFind: The character expression to find.
  • expressionToSearch: The character expression, typically a column, to search.

                      SELECT POSITION('456' IN '123456');
                      -- Result: 4

                      SELECT POSITION('x' IN '123456');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

QUOTENAME(character_string [, quote_character])

Returns a valid SQL Server-delimited identifier by adding the necessary delimiters to the specified Unicode string.

  • character_string: The string of Unicode character data. The string is limited to 128 characters. Inputs greater than 128 characters return null.
  • quote_character: An optional single character to be used as the delimiter. These include:
    • a single quotation mark (')
    • a left or right bracket ([])
    • a double quotation mark (")
    • a left or right parenthesis ( () )
    • a greater or less than sign (><)
    • a left or right brace ({})
    • a backtick (`)

    If quote_character is not specified brackets are used. If an unacceptable character is supplied, it returns NULL.


                      SELECT QUOTENAME('table_name');
                      -- Result: '[table_name]'

                      SELECT QUOTENAME('table_name', '"');
                      -- Result: '"table_name"'

                      SELECT QUOTENAME('table_name', '[');
                      -- Result: '[table_name]'
                    

REGEXP_REPLACE(expr, pattern [, replacement [, position [, occurrence [, match_type]]]])

Replaces occurrences of a regular expression pattern in the input string with a specified value and returns the resulting string.

  • expr: The string expression to be searched.
  • pattern: The regular expression pattern to match.
  • replacement: (optional) The string to replace each matched occurrence of pattern with. Supports backreferences \1 through \9 and escape sequences \n, \r, \t, and \\. By default, this argument is an empty string, meaning matched portions are removed from the output string.
  • position: (optional) The 1-based starting position used when searching for regular expression matches in expr. The default is 1. All characters prior to the starting position are included in the output string unaltered. Skipped characters are ignored when calculating regular expression matches, even if they match pattern.
  • occurrence: (optional) Specifies whether all occurrences of pattern,, or only a specific occurrence of pattern are replaced. The default is 0, which means all occurrences of pattern are replaced with replacement. Set to 1 to only replace the first instance of the pattern; 2 to replace the second; etc.
  • match_type: (optional) Modifiers used to customize matching behavior. Supported values are: 'c' (case-sensitive, default), 'i' (case-insensitive), 'm' (multiline), 'n' (dot matches newline), 'x' (extended mode). These can be freely combined by including the letters back to back. For example, 'im' applies the functionality of both 'i' and 'm'. The regular expression syntax used is that of the Extended mode ('x') ignores whitespace and allows inline comments. If the pattern needs to match a literal space, it must be explicitly escaped.

                      SELECT REGEXP_REPLACE('abc123def456', '\d+', 'NUM');
                      -- Result: 'abcNUMdefNUM'

                      SELECT REGEXP_REPLACE('Hello\nHELLO\nhello', '^hello', 'X', 1, 0, 'im');
                      -- Result: 'X\nX\nX'
                    

REPLACE(string_expression, string_pattern, string_replacement)

Replaces all occurrences of a string with another string.

  • string_expression: The string expression to be searched. This can be a character or binary data type.
  • string_pattern: The substring to be found. Cannot be an empty string.
  • string_replacement: The replacement string.

                      SELECT REPLACE('1234567890', '456', '|');
                      -- Result: '123|7890'

                      SELECT REPLACE('123123123', '123', '.');
                      -- Result: '...'

                      SELECT REPLACE('1234567890', 'a', 'b');
                      -- Result: '1234567890'
                    

REPLICATE ( string_expression ,integer_expression )

Repeats the string value the specified number of times.

  • string_expression: The string to replicate.
  • integer_expression: The repeat count.

                      SELECT REPLACE('x', 5);
                      -- Result: 'xxxxx'
                    

REVERSE ( string_expression )

Returns the reverse order of the string expression.

  • string_expression: The string.

                      SELECT REVERSE('1234567890');
                      -- Result: '0987654321'
                    

RIGHT ( character_expression , integer_expression )

Returns the right part of the string with the specified number of characters.

  • character_expression: The character expression.
  • integer_expression: The positive integer that specifies how many characters of the character expression will be returned.

                      SELECT RIGHT('1234567890', 3);
                      -- Result: '890'
                    

RTRIM(character_expression)

Returns the character expression after it removes trailing blanks.

  • character_expression: The character expression.

                      SELECT RTRIM('trimmed     ');
                      -- Result: 'trimmed'
                    

SOUNDEX(character_expression)

Returns the four-character Soundex code, based on how the string sounds when spoken.

  • character_expression: The alphanumeric expression of character data.

                      SELECT SOUNDEX('smith');
                      -- Result: 'S530'
                    

SPACE(repeatcount)

Returns the string that consists of repeated spaces.

  • repeatcount: The number of spaces.

                      SELECT SPACE(5);
                      -- Result: '     '
                    

SPLIT(string, delimiter, offset)

Returns a section of the string between to delimiters.

  • string: The string to split.
  • delimiter: The character to split the string with.
  • offset: The number of the split to return. Positive numbers are treated as offsets from the left, and negative numbers are treated as offsets from the right.

                      SELECT SPLIT('a/b/c/d', '/', 1);
                      -- Result: 'a'
                      SELECT SPLIT('a/b/c/d', '/', -2);
                      -- Result: 'c'
                    

STARTSWITH(character_expression, character_prefix)

Returns 1 if character_expression starts with character_prefix; otherwise, 0.

  • character_expression: The character expression.
  • character_prefix: The character prefix to search for.

                      SELECT STARTSWITH('0123456', '012');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT STARTSWITH('0123456', '456');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

STR ( float_expression [ , integer_length [ , integer_decimal ] ] )

Returns the character data converted from the numeric data. For example, STR(123.45, 6, 1) returns 123.5.

  • float_expression: The float expression.
  • length: The optional total length to return. This includes decimal point, sign, digits, and spaces. The default is 10.
  • decimal: The optional number of places to the right of the decimal point. The decimal must be less than or equal to 16.

                      SELECT STR('123.456');
                      -- Result: '123'

                      SELECT STR('123.456', 2);
                      -- Result: '**'

                      SELECT STR('123.456', 10, 2);
                      -- Result: '123.46'
                    

STUFF(character_expression , integer_start , integer_length , replaceWith_expression)

Inserts a string into another string. It deletes the specified length of characters in the first string at the start position and then inserts the second string into the first string at the start position.

  • character_expression: The string expression.
  • start: The integer value that specifies the location to start deletion and insertion. If start or length is negative, null is returned. If start is longer than the string to be modified, character_expression, null is returned.
  • length: The integer that specifies the number of characters to delete. If length is longer than character_expression, deletion occurs up to the last character in replaceWith_expression.
  • replaceWith_expression: The expression of character data that will replace length characters of character_expression beginning at the start value.

                      SELECT STUFF('1234567890', 3, 2, 'xx');
                      -- Result: '12xx567890'
                    

SUBSTRING(string_value FROM start FOR length)

Returns the part of the string with the specified length; starts at the specified index.

  • string_value: The character string.
  • start: The positive integer that specifies the start index of characters to return.
  • length: Optional. The positive integer that specifies how many characters will be returned.

                      SELECT SUBSTRING('1234567890' FROM 3 FOR 2);
                      -- Result: '34'

                      SELECT SUBSTRING('1234567890' FROM 3);
                      -- Result: '34567890'
                    
You can also drop the FROM and FOR clauses:
                    SELECT SUBSTRING('1234567890', 3, 2)
                    --Result: '34'
                    SELECT SUBSTRING('1234567890', 3)
                    --Result: '34567890'
                    

TEXT_ENCODE(input_string, charset)

Returns binary output by encoding a string using the specified character set.

  • input_string: The plain text string.
  • charset: The character set to use, such as 'UTF-8', 'ISO-8859-1'.

                    SELECT TEXT_ENCODE('Café', 'UTF-8');
                    -- Result: (binary output)
                    

TEXT_DECODE(input_binary, charset)

Returns a string decoded from binary data using the specified character set.

  • input_binary: The binary value to decode.
  • charset: The character set used for decoding.

                    SELECT TEXT_DECODE(BinaryData, 'UTF-8');
                    -- Result: 'Café'
                    

TOSTRING(string_value1)

Converts the value of this instance to its equivalent string representation.

  • string_value1: The string to be converted.

                      SELECT TOSTRING(123);
                      -- Result: '123'

                      SELECT TOSTRING(123.456);
                      -- Result: '123.456'

                      SELECT TOSTRING(null);
                      -- Result: ''
                    

TRIM(trimspec trimchar FROM string_value)

Returns the character expression with leading and/or trailing blanks removed.

  • trimspec: Optional. If included must be one of the keywords BOTH, LEADING or TRAILING.
  • trimchar: Optional. If included should be a one-character string value.
  • string_value: The string value to trim.

                      SELECT TRIM('     trimmed     ');
                      -- Result: 'trimmed'

                      SELECT TRIM(LEADING FROM '     trimmed     ');
                      -- Result: 'trimmed     '

                      SELECT TRIM('-' FROM '-----trimmed-----');
                      -- Result: 'trimmed'

                      SELECT TRIM(BOTH '-' FROM '-----trimmed-----');
                      -- Result: 'trimmed'

                      SELECT TRIM(TRAILING '-' FROM '-----trimmed-----');
                      -- Result: '-----trimmed'
                    

UNICODE(ncharacter_expression)

Returns the integer value defined by the Unicode standard of the first character of the input expression.

  • ncharacter_expression: The Unicode character expression.

UPPER ( character_expression )

Returns the character expression with lowercase character data converted to uppercase.

  • character_expression: The character expression.

                      SELECT UPPER('MIXED case');
                      -- Result: 'MIXED CASE'
                    

XML_EXTRACT(xml, xpath [, separator])

Extracts an XML document using the specified XPath to flatten the XML. A comma is used to separate the outputs by default, but this can be changed by specifying the third parameter.

  • xml: The XML document to extract.
  • xpath: The XPath used to select the nodes. The nodes selected will be returned in a token-separated list.
  • separator: The optional token used to separate the items in the flattened response. If this is not specified, the separator will be a comma.

                      SELECT XML_EXTRACT('<vowels><ch>a</ch><ch>e</ch><ch>i</ch><ch>o</ch><ch>u</ch></vowels>', '/vowels/ch');
                      -- Result: 'a,e,i,o,u'

                      SELECT XML_EXTRACT('<vowels><ch>a</ch><ch>e</ch><ch>i</ch><ch>o</ch><ch>u</ch></vowels>', '/vowels/ch', ';');
                      -- Result: 'a;e;i;o;u'
                    

CData Python Connector for Box

MATH Functions

ABS ( numeric_expression )

Returns the absolute (positive) value of the specified numeric expression.

  • numeric_expression: The expression of an indeterminate numeric data type except for the bit data type.

                      SELECT ABS(15);
                      -- Result: 15

                      SELECT ABS(-15);
                      -- Result: 15
                    

ACOS ( float_expression )

Returns the arc cosine, the angle in radians whose cosine is the specified float expression.

  • float_expression: The float expression that specifies the cosine of the angle to be returned. Values outside the range from -1 to 1 return null.

                      SELECT ACOS(0.5);
                      -- Result: 1.0471975511966
                    

ASIN ( float_expression )

Returns the arc sine, the angle in radians whose sine is the specified float expression.

  • float_expression: The float expression that specifies the sine of the angle to be returned. Values outside the range from -1 to 1 return null.

                      SELECT ASIN(0.5);
                      -- Result: 0.523598775598299
                    

ATAN ( float_expression )

Returns the arc tangent, the angle in radians whose tangent is the specified float expression.

  • float_expression: The float expression that specifies the tangent of the angle to be returned.

                      SELECT ATAN(10);
                      -- Result: 1.47112767430373
                    

ATN2 ( float_expression1 , float_expression2 )

Returns the angle in radians between the positive x-axis and the ray from the origin to the point (y, x) where x and y are the values of the two specified float expressions.

  • float_expression1: The float expression that is the y-coordinate.
  • float_expression2: The float expression that is the x-coordinate.

                      SELECT ATN2(1, 1);
                      -- Result: 0.785398163397448
                    

CEILING ( numeric_expression ) or CEIL( numeric_expression )

Returns the smallest integer greater than or equal to the specified numeric expression.

  • numeric_expression: The expression of an indeterminate numeric data type except for the bit data type.

                      SELECT CEILING(1.3);
                      -- Result: 2

                      SELECT CEILING(1.5);
                      -- Result: 2

                      SELECT CEILING(1.7);
                      -- Result: 2
                    

COS ( float_expression )

Returns the trigonometric cosine of the specified angle in radians in the specified expression.

  • float_expression: The float expression of the specified angle in radians.

                      SELECT COS(1);
                      -- Result: 0.54030230586814
                    

COT ( float_expression )

Returns the trigonometric cotangent of the angle in radians specified by float_expression.

  • float_expression: The float expression of the angle in radians.

                      SELECT COT(1);
                      -- Result: 0.642092615934331
                    

DEGREES ( numeric_expression )

Returns the angle in degrees for the angle specified in radians.

  • numeric_expression: The angle in radians, an expression of an indeterminate numeric data type except for the bit data type.

                      SELECT DEGREES(3.1415926);
                      -- Result: 179.999996929531
                    

EXP ( float_expression )

Returns the exponential value of the specified float expression. For example, EXP(LOG(20)) is 20.

  • float_expression: The float expression.

                      SELECT EXP(2);
                      -- Result: 7.38905609893065
                    

EXPR ( expression )

Evaluates the expression.

  • expression: The expression. Operators allowed are +, -, *, /, ==, !=, >, <, >=, and <=.

                      SELECT EXPR('1 + 2 * 3');
                      -- Result: 7

                      SELECT EXPR('1 + 2 * 3 == 7');
                      -- Result: true
                    

FLOOR ( numeric_expression )

Returns the largest integer less than or equal to the numeric expression.

  • numeric_expression: The expression of an indeterminate numeric data type except for the bit data type.

                      SELECT FLOOR(1.3);
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT FLOOR(1.5);
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT FLOOR(1.7);
                      -- Result: 1
                    

GREATEST(int1,int2,....)

Returns the greatest of the supplied integers.

				SELECT GREATEST(3,5,8,10,1)
				-- Result: 10			
				

HEX(value)

Returns a the equivalent hex for the input value.

  • value: A string or numerical value to be converted into hex.

				SELECT HEX(866849198);
				-- Result: 33AB11AE
				
				SELECT HEX('Sample Text');
				-- Result: 53616D706C652054657874
				

JSON_AVG(json, jsonpath)

Computes the average value of a JSON array within a JSON object. The path to the array is specified in the jsonpath argument. Return value is numeric or null.

  • json: The JSON document to compute.
  • jsonpath: The JSONPath used to select the nodes. [x], [2..], [..8], or [1..12] are accepted. [x] selects all nodes.

                      SELECT JSON_AVG('[1,2,3,4,5]', '$[x]');
                      -- Result: 3

                      SELECT JSON_AVG('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[x]');
                      -- Result: 3

                      SELECT JSON_AVG('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[3..]');
                      -- Result: 4.5
                    

JSON_COUNT(json, jsonpath)

Returns the number of elements in a JSON array within a JSON object. The path to the array is specified in the jsonpath argument. Return value is numeric or null.

  • json: The JSON document to compute.
  • jsonpath: The JSONPath used to select the nodes. [x], [2..], [..8], or [1..12] are accepted. [x] selects all nodes.

                      SELECT JSON_COUNT('[1,2,3,4,5]', '$[x]');
                      -- Result: 5

                      SELECT JSON_COUNT('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[x]');
                      -- Result: 5

                      SELECT JSON_COUNT('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[3..]');
                      -- Result: 2
                    

JSON_MAX(json, jsonpath)

Gets the maximum value in a JSON array within a JSON object. The path to the array is specified in the jsonpath argument. Return value is numeric or null.

  • json: The JSON document to compute.
  • jsonpath: The JSONPath used to select the nodes. [x], [2..], [..8], or [1..12] are accepted. [x] selects all nodes.

                      SELECT JSON_MAX('[1,2,3,4,5]', '$[x]');
                      -- Result: 5

                      SELECT JSON_MAX('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[x]');
                      -- Result: 5

                      SELECT JSON_MAX('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[..3]');
                      -- Result: 4
                    

JSON_MIN(json, jsonpath)

Gets the minimum value in a JSON array within a JSON object. The path to the array is specified in the jsonpath argument. Return value is numeric or null.

  • json: The JSON document to compute.
  • jsonpath: The JSONPath used to select the nodes. [x], [2..], [..8], or [1..12] are accepted. [x] selects all nodes.

                      SELECT JSON_MIN('[1,2,3,4,5]', '$[x]');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT JSON_MIN('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[x]');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT JSON_MIN('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[3..]');
                      -- Result: 4
                    

JSON_SUM(json, jsonpath)

Computes the summary value in JSON according to the JSONPath expression. Return value is numeric or null.

  • json: The JSON document to compute.
  • jsonpath: The JSONPath used to select the nodes. [x], [2..], [..8], or [1..12] are accepted. [x] selects all nodes.

                      SELECT JSON_SUM('[1,2,3,4,5]', '$[x]');
                      -- Result: 15

                      SELECT JSON_SUM('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[x]');
                      -- Result: 15

                      SELECT JSON_SUM('{"test": {"data": [1,2,3,4,5]}}', '$.test.data[3..]');
                      -- Result: 9
                    

LEAST(int1,int2,....)

Returns the least of the supplied integers.

				SELECT LEAST(3,5,8,10,1)
				-- Result: 1			
				

LOG ( float_expression [, base ] )

Returns the natural logarithm of the specified float expression.

  • float_expression: The float expression.
  • base: The optional integer argument that sets the base for the logarithm.

                      SELECT LOG(7.3890560);
                      -- Result: 1.99999998661119
                    

LOG10 ( float_expression )

Returns the base-10 logarithm of the specified float expression.

  • float_expression: The expression of type float.

                      SELECT LOG10(10000);
                      -- Result: 4
                    

MOD(dividend,divisor)

Returns the integer value associated with the remainder when dividing the dividend by the divisor.

  • dividend: The number to take the modulus of.
  • divisor: The number to divide the dividend by when determining the modulus.

				SELECT MOD(10,3);
				-- Result: 1
				

NEGATE(real_number)

Returns the opposite to the real number input.

  • real_number: The real number to find the opposite of.

				SELECT NEGATE(10);
				-- Result: -10
				
				SELECT NEGATE(-12.4)
				--Result: 12.4
				

PI ( )

Returns the constant value of pi.

                  SELECT PI()
                  -- Result: 3.14159265358979 
                

POWER ( float_expression , y )

Returns the value of the specified expression raised to the specified power.

  • float_expression: The float expression.
  • y: The power to raise float_expression to.

                      SELECT POWER(2, 10);
                      -- Result: 1024

                      SELECT POWER(2, -2);
                      -- Result: 0.25
                    

RADIANS ( float_expression )

Returns the angle in radians of the angle in degrees.

  • float_expression: The degrees of the angle as a float expression.

                      SELECT RADIANS(180);
                      -- Result: 3.14159265358979
                    

RAND ( [ integer_seed ] )

Returns a pseudorandom float value from 0 through 1, exclusive.

  • seed: The optional integer expression that specifies the seed value. If seed is not specified, a seed value at random will be assigned.

                      SELECT RAND();
                      -- This result may be different, since the seed is randomized
                      -- Result: 0.873159630165044

                      SELECT RAND(1);
                      -- This result will always be the same, since the seed is constant
                      -- Result: 0.248668584157093
                    

ROUND ( numeric_expression [ ,integer_length] [ ,function ] )

Returns the numeric value rounded to the specified length or precision.

  • numeric_expression: The expression of a numeric data type.
  • length: The optional precision to round the numeric expression to. When this is omitted, the default behavior will be to round to the nearest whole number.
  • function: The optional type of operation to perform. When the function parameter is omitted or has a value of 0 (default), numeric_expression is rounded. When a value other than 0 is specified, numeric_expression is truncated.

                      SELECT ROUND(1.3, 0);
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ROUND(1.55, 1);
                      -- Result: 1.6

                      SELECT ROUND(1.7, 0, 0);
                      -- Result: 2

                      SELECT ROUND(1.7, 0, 1);
                      -- Result: 1
                      
                      SELECT ROUND (1.24);
                      -- Result: 1.0
                    

SIGN ( numeric_expression )

Returns the positive sign (1), 0, or negative sign (-1) of the specified expression.

  • numeric_expression: The expression of an indeterminate data type except for the bit data type.

                      SELECT SIGN(0);
                      -- Result: 0

                      SELECT SIGN(10);
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT SIGN(-10);
                      -- Result: -1
                    

SIN ( float_expression )

Returns the trigonometric sine of the angle in radians.

  • float_expression: The float expression specifying the angle in radians.

                     SELECT SIN(1);
                     -- Result: 0.841470984807897
                    

SQRT ( float_expression )

Returns the square root of the specified float value.

  • float_expression: The expression of type float.

                      SELECT SQRT(100);
                      -- Result: 10
                    

SQUARE ( float_expression )

Returns the square of the specified float value.

  • float_expression: The expression of type float.

                      SELECT SQUARE(10);
                      -- Result: 100

                      SELECT SQUARE(-10);
                      -- Result: 100
                    

TAN ( float_expression )

Returns the tangent of the input expression.

  • float_expression: The expression of type float.

                      SELECT TAN(1);
                      -- Result: 1.5574077246549
                    

TRUNC(decimal_number,precision)

Returns the supplied decimal number truncated to have the supplied decimal precision.

  • decimal_number: The decimal value to truncate.
  • precision: The number of decimal places to truncate the decimal number to.

				SELECT TRUNC(10.3423,2);
				-- Result: 10.34
				

_ROW_NUMBER_()

Returns a row index as an additional column.

				SELECT ColumnName, _ROW_NUMBER_() FROM TableName
				-- Result: ColumnData, 0
				ColumnData2, 1
				ColumnData3, 2
				

CData Python Connector for Box

DATE Functions

CURRENT_DATE()

Returns the current date value.

                  SELECT CURRENT_DATE();
                  -- Result: 2018-02-01
                

CURRENT_TIMESTAMP()

Returns the current time stamp of the database system as a datetime value. This value is equal to GETDATE and SYSDATETIME, and is always in the local timezone.

                  SELECT CURRENT_TIMESTAMP();
                  -- Result: 2018-02-01 03:04:05
                

DATEADD (datepart , integer_number , date [, dateformat])

Returns the datetime value that results from adding the specified number (a signed integer) to the specified date part of the date.

  • datepart: The part of the date to add the specified number to. The valid values and abbreviations are
    • year (yy, yyyy)
    • quarter (qq, q)
    • month (mm, m)
    • week (wk, ww)
    • weekday (dw)
    • dayofyear (dy, y)
    • day (dd, d)
    • hour (hh)
    • minute (mi, n)
    • second (ss, s)
    • millisecond (ms)
  • number: The number to be added.
  • date: The expression of the datetime data type.
  • dateformat: The optional output date format.

                  SELECT DATEADD('d', 5, '2018-02-01');
                  -- Result: 2018-02-06

                  SELECT DATEADD('hh', 5, '2018-02-01 00:00:00');
                  -- Result: 2018-02-01 05:00:00
                

DATEDIFF ( datepart , startdate , enddate )

Returns the difference (a signed integer) of the specified time interval between the specified start date and end date.

  • datepart: The part of the date that is the time interval of the difference between the start date and end date. The valid values and abbreviations are:
    • Year (year, yyyy, yy)
    • Quarter (quarter, qq, q)
    • Month (month, mm, m)
    • Week (week, wk, ww)
    • Weekday (weekday, dw)
    • Dayofyear (dayofyear, dy, y)
    • Day (day, dd, d)
    • Hour (hour, hh)
    • Minute (minute, mi, n)
    • Second (second, ss, s)
    • Millisecond (millisecond, ms)
  • startdate: The datetime expression of the start date.
  • enddate: The datetime expression of the end date.

                  SELECT DATEDIFF('d', '2018-02-01', '2018-02-10');
                  -- Result: 9

                  SELECT DATEDIFF('hh', '2018-02-01 00:00:00', '2018-02-01 12:00:00');
                  -- Result: 12
                

DATE_FORMAT(date,format)

Returns the date or timestamp in the format specified. This function mirrors the MySQL DATE_FORMAT function.

  • date: A date or timestamp string.
  • format: The specifier string of the desired output format. The list of supported format specifiers comes from the MySQL DATE_FORMAT function (see link to MySQL documentation above).

					SELECT DATE_FORMAT('9/4/2021 3:11:53 AM','%h')
					-- Result: 03
				  

DATEFROMPARTS(integer_year, integer_month, integer_day)

Returns the datetime value for the specified year, month, and day.

  • year: The integer expression specifying the year.
  • month: The integer expression specifying the month.
  • day: The integer expression specifying the day.

                    SELECT DATEFROMPARTS(2018, 2, 1);
                    -- Result: 2018-02-01
                  

DATENAME(datepart , date)

Returns the character string that represents the specified date part of the specified date.

  • datepart: The part of the date to return. The valid values and abbreviations are year (yy, yyyy), quarter (qq, q), month (mm, m), dayofyear (dy, y), day (dd, d), week (wk, ww), weekday (dw), hour (hh), minute (mi, n), second (ss, s), millisecond (ms), microsecond (mcs), and nanosecond (ns).
  • date: The datetime expression.

                     SELECT DATENAME('yy', '2018-02-01');
                     -- Result: '2018'

                     SELECT DATENAME('dw', '2018-02-01');
                     -- Result: 'Thursday'
                   

DATEPART(datepart, date [,integer_datefirst])

Returns a character string that represents the specified date part of the specified date.

  • datepart: The part of the date to return. The valid values and abbreviations are year (yy, yyyy), quarter (qq, q), month (mm, m), dayofyear (dy, y), day (dd, d), week (wk, ww), weekday (dw), hour (hh), minute (mi, n), second (ss, s), millisecond (ms), microsecond (mcs), nanosecond (ns), ISODOW, ISO_WEEK (isoweek, isowk,isoww), and ISOYEAR.
  • date: The datetime string.
  • datefirst: The optional integer representing the first day of the week. The default is 7, Sunday.

                    SELECT DATEPART('yy', '2018-02-01');
                    -- Result: 2018

                    SELECT DATEPART('dw', '2018-02-01');
                    -- Result: 5
                  

DATETIMEFROMPARTS(integer_year, integer_month, integer_day, integer_hour, integer_minute, integer_seconds, integer_milliseconds)

Returns the datetime value for the specified date parts.

  • year: The integer expression specifying the year.
  • month: The integer expression specifying the month.
  • day: The integer expression specifying the day.
  • hour: The integer expression specifying the hour.
  • minute: The integer expression specifying the minute.
  • seconds: The integer expression specifying the seconds.
  • milliseconds: The integer expression specifying the milliseconds.

                    SELECT DATETIMEFROMPARTS(2018, 2, 1, 1, 2, 3, 456);
                    -- Result: 2018-02-01 01:02:03.456
                  

DATETIME2FROMPARTS(integer_year, integer_month, integer_day, integer_hour, integer_minute, integer_seconds, integer_fractions, integer_precision)

Returns the datetime value for the specified date parts.

  • year: The integer expression specifying the year.
  • month: The integer expression specifying the month.
  • day: The integer expression specifying the day.
  • hour: The integer expression specifying the hour.
  • minute: The integer expression specifying the minute.
  • seconds: The integer expression specifying the seconds.
  • fractions: The integer expression specifying the fractions of the second.
  • precision: The integer expression specifying the precision of the fraction.

				    SELECT DATETIME2FROMPARTS(2018, 2, 1, 1, 2, 3, 456, 3);
                    -- Result: 2018-02-01 01:02:03.456
                  

DATE_TRUNC(date, datepart)

Truncates the date to the precision of the given date part. Modeled after the Oracle TRUNC function.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.
  • datepart: Refer to the Oracle documentation for valid datepart syntax.

				    SELECT DATE_TRUNC('05-04-2005', 'YY');
                    -- Result: '1/1/2005'
					
                    SELECT DATE_TRUNC('05-04-2005', 'MM');
                    -- Result: '5/1/2005'                    
                  

DATE_TRUNC2(datepart, date, [weekday])

Truncates the date to the precision of the given date part. Modeled after the PostgreSQL date_trunc function.

  • datepart: One of 'millennium', 'century', 'decade', 'year', 'quarter', 'month', 'week', 'day', 'hour', 'minute' or 'second'.
  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.
  • weekday: The optional day of the week to use as the first day for 'week'. One of 'sunday', 'monday', etc.

                    SELECT DATE_TRUNC2('year', '2020-02-04');
                    -- Result: '2020-01-01'

                    SELECT DATE_TRUNC2('week', '2020-02-04', 'monday');
                    -- Result: '2020-02-02', which is the previous Monday
                  

DAY(date)

Returns the integer that specifies the day component of the specified date.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

                    SELECT DAY('2018-02-01');
                    -- Result: 1
                  

DAYNAME(date)

Returns the name of the day of the week of the specified date.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

                    SELECT DAYNAME('8/18/2021');
                    -- Result: Wednesday
                  

DAYOFMONTH(date)

Returns the day of the month of the given date part.
  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				  SELECT DAYOFMONTH('04/15/2000');
				  -- Result: 15
				  

DAYOFWEEK(date)

Returns the day of the week of the given date part.
  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				  SELECT DAYOFWEEK('04/15/2000');
				  -- Result: 7
				  

DAYOFYEAR(date)

Returns the day of the year of the given date part.
  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				  SELECT DAYOFYEAR('04/15/2000');
				  -- Result: 106
				  

EOMONTH(date [, integer_month_to_add ]) or LAST_DAY(date)

Returns the last day of the month that contains the specified date with an optional offset.

  • date: The datetime expression specifying the date for which to return the last day of the month.
  • integer_month_to_add: The optional integer expression specifying the number of months to add to the date before calculating the end of the month.

                  SELECT EOMONTH('2018-02-01');
                  -- Result: 2018-02-28
                  
                  SELECT LAST_DAY('2018-02-01');
                  -- Result: 2018-02-28

                  SELECT EOMONTH('2018-02-01', 2);
                  -- Result: 2018-04-30
                

EXTRACT(date_part FROM date_column_name)

Returns the last day of the month that contains the specified date with an optional offset.

  • date_part: One of the following date components: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND.
  • date_column_name: The name of a date column in a table.

                  SELECT EXTRACT(YEAR FROM DateColumn)
                  -- Result: 2021
                

FDWEEK(date)

Returns the first day of the week of the given date part.
  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.
  • weeks to add: An optional integer expression specifying the number of months to add to the date before calculating the first day of the week.

				  SELECT FDWEEK('02-08-2018');
				  -- Result: 2/4/2018

          SELECT FDWEEK('02-08-2018', 1)
          --Result: 02/11/2018
				  

FDMONTH(date)

Returns the first day of the month of the given date part.
  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.
  • month to add: An optional integer expression specifying the number of months to add to the date before calculating the first day of the month.

				  SELECT FDMONTH('02-08-2018');
				  -- Result: 2/1/2018

          SELECT FDMONTH('02-08-2018', 1) 
          --Result: 03/01/2018
				  

FDQUARTER(date)

Returns the first day of the quarter of the given date part.
  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.
  • quarters to add: An optional integer expression specifying the number of months to add to the date before calculating the first day of the quarter.

				  SELECT FDQUARTER('05-08-2018');
				  -- Result: 4/1/2018

          SELECT FDQUARTER('05-08-2018',1)
          --Result: 07/01/2018
				  

FILEMODIFIEDTIME(uri)

Returns the time stamp associated with the Date Modified of the relevant file.

  • uri: An absolute path pointing to a file on the local file system.

				 SELECT FILEMODIFIEDTIME('C:/Documents/myfile.txt');
				 -- Result: 6/25/2019 10:06:58 AM
				 

FROM_DAYS(datevalue)

Returns a date derived from the number of days after 1582-10-15 (based upon the Gregorian calendar). This will be equivalent to the MYSQL FROM_DAYS function.

  • datevalue: A integer value representing the number of days since 1582-10-15.

				SELECT FROM_DAYS(736000);
				-- Result: 2/6/2015
				

FROM_UNIXTIME(time, issecond)

Returns a representation of the unix_timestamp argument as a value in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS expressed in the current time zone.

  • time: The time stamp value from epoch time. Milliseconds are accepted.
  • issecond: Indicates the time stamp value is milliseconds to epoch time.

                      SELECT FROM_UNIXTIME(1540495231, 1);
                      -- Result: 2018-10-25 19:20:31

                      SELECT FROM_UNIXTIME(1540495357385, 0);
                      -- Result: 2018-10-25 19:22:37
                    

GETDATE()

Returns the current time stamp of the database system as a datetime value. This value is equal to CURRENT_TIMESTAMP and SYSDATETIME, and is always in the local timezone.

                  SELECT GETDATE();
                  -- Result: 2018-02-01 03:04:05
                

GETUTCDATE()

Returns the current time stamp of the database system formatted as a UTC datetime value. This value is equal to SYSUTCDATETIME.

In addition, GETUTCDATE can take an optional second parameter, a date and time that are converted to UTC.

                  SELECT GETUTCDATE();
                  -- For example, if the local timezone is Eastern European Time (GMT+2)
                  -- Result: 2018-02-01 05:04:05

                  SELECT GETUTCDATE('2020/08/31 13:56:00')
                  --Result: '2020-08-31 17:56:00'
                

HOUR(date)

Returns the hour component from the provided datetime.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				SELECT HOUR('02-02-2020 11:30:00');
				-- Result: 11
				

ISDATE(date, [date_format])

Returns 1 if the value is a valid date, time, or datetime value; otherwise, 0.

  • date: The datetime string.
  • date_format: The optional datetime format.

                      SELECT ISDATE('2018-02-01', 'yyyy-MM-dd');
                      -- Result: 1

                      SELECT ISDATE('Not a date');
                      -- Result: 0
                    

LAST_WEEK()

Returns a time stamp equivalent to exactly one week before the current date.

				SELECT LAST_WEEK();	//Assume the date is 3/17/2020	
			 -- Result: 3/10/2020 00:00:00
				

LAST_MONTH()

Returns a time stamp equivalent to exactly one month before the current date.

	
				SELECT LAST_MONTH(); //Assume the date is 3/17/2020
				-- Result: 2/17/2020 00:00:00
				

LAST_YEAR()

Returns a time stamp equivalent to exactly one year before the current date.

				SELECT LAST_YEAR();	//Assume the date is 3/17/2020	
				-- Result: 3/10/2019 00:00:00
				

LDWEEK(date)

Returns the last day of the provided week.

  • date: The datetime string.
  • weeks to add: An optional integer expression specifying the number of months to add to the date before calculating the last day of the week.

				SELECT LDWEEK('02-02-2020');
				-- Result: 2/8/2020
				

LDMONTH(date)

Returns the last day of the provided month.

  • date: The datetime string.
  • months to add: An optional integer expression specifying the number of months to add to the date before calculating the last day of the month.

				SELECT LDMONTH('02-02-2020');
				-- Result: 2/29/2020

        SELECT LDMONTH('02-08-2020', 1)
        --Result: 03/31/2020
				

LDQUARTER(date)

Returns the last day of the provided quarter.

  • date: The datetime string.
  • quarters to add: An optional integer expression specifying the number of months to add to the date before calculating the last day of the quarter.

				SELECT LDQUARTER('02-02-2020');
				-- Result: 3/31/2020

        SELECT LDQUARTER('02-02-2020',1)
        --Result: 06/30/2020
				

MAKEDATE(year, days)

Returns a date value from a year and a number of days.

  • year: The year
  • days: The number of days into the year. Value must be greater than 0.

          SELECT MAKEDATE(2020, 1);
          -- Result: 2020-01-01
        

MINUTE(date)

Returns the minute component from the provided datetime.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				SELECT MINUTE('02-02-2020 11:15:00');
				-- Result: 15
				

MONTH(date)

Returns the month component from the provided datetime.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				SELECT MONTH('02-02-2020');
				-- Result: 2
				

QUARTER(date)

Returns the quarter associated with the provided datetime.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				SELECT QUARTER('02-02-2020');
				-- Result: 1
				

SECOND(date)

Returns the second component from the provided datetime.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				SELECT SECOND('02-02-2020 11:15:23');
				-- Result: 23
				

SMALLDATETIMEFROMPARTS(integer_year, integer_month, integer_day, integer_hour, integer_minute)

Returns the datetime value for the specified date and time.

  • year: The integer expression specifying the year.
  • month: The integer expression specifying the month.
  • day: The integer expression specifying the day.
  • hour: The integer expression specifying the hour.
  • minute: The integer expression specifying the minute.

                      SELECT SMALLDATETIMEFROMPARTS(2018, 2, 1, 1, 2);
                      -- Result: 2018-02-01 01:02:00
                    

STRTODATE(string,format)

Parses the provided string value and returns the corresponding datetime.

  • string: The string value to be converted to datetime format.
  • format: A format string which describes how to interpret the first string input. A few special formats are available as well, including UNIX, UNIXMILIS, TICKS, and FILETICKS.

				SELECT STRTODATE('03*04*2020','dd*MM*yyyy');
				-- Result: 4/3/2020
				

SYSDATETIME()

Returns the current time stamp as a datetime value of the database system. It is equal to GETDATE and CURRENT_TIMESTAMP, and is always in the local timezone.

                  SELECT SYSDATETIME();
                  -- Result: 2018-02-01 03:04:05
                

SYSUTCDATETIME()

Returns the current system date and time as a UTC datetime value. It is equal to GETUTCDATE.

                  SELECT SYSUTCDATETIME();
                  -- For example, if the local timezone is Eastern European Time (GMT+2)
                  -- Result: 2018-02-01 05:04:05
                

TIMEFROMPARTS(integer_hour, integer_minute, integer_seconds, integer_fractions, integer_precision)

Returns the time value for the specified time and with the specified precision.

  • hour: The integer expression specifying the hour.
  • minute: The integer expression specifying the minute.
  • seconds: The integer expression specifying the seconds.
  • fractions: The integer expression specifying the fractions of the second.
  • precision : The integer expression specifying the precision of the fraction.

                      SELECT TIMEFROMPARTS(1, 2, 3, 456, 3);
                      -- Result: 01:02:03.456
                    

TO_DAYS(date)

Returns the number of days since 0000-00-01. This will only return a value for dates on or after 1582-10-15 (based upon the Gregorian calendar). This will be equivalent to the MYSQL TO_DAYS function.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				SELECT TO_DAYS('02-06-2015');
				-- Result: 736000
				

WEEK(date)

Returns the week (of the year) associated with the provided datetime.

  • date: The datetime string that specifies the date.

				SELECT WEEK('02-17-2020 11:15:23');
				-- Result: 8
				

YEAR(date)

Returns the integer that specifies the year of the specified date.

  • date: The datetime string.

                      SELECT YEAR('2018-02-01');
                      -- Result: 2018
                    

CData Python Connector for Box

Date Literal Functions

The following date literal functions can be used to filter date fields using relative intervals. Note that while the <, >, and = operators are supported for these functions, <= and >= are not.

L_TODAY()

The current day.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_TODAY()

L_YESTERDAY()

The previous day.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_YESTERDAY()

L_TOMORROW()

The following day.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_TOMORROW()

L_LAST_WEEK()

Every day in the preceding week.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_LAST_WEEK()

L_THIS_WEEK()

Every day in the current week.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_THIS_WEEK()

L_NEXT_WEEK()

Every day in the following week.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_NEXT_WEEK()
Also available:
  • L_LAST/L_THIS/L_NEXT MONTH
  • L_LAST/L_THIS/L_NEXT QUARTER
  • L_LAST/L_THIS/L_NEXT YEAR

L_LAST_N_DAYS(n)

The previous n days, excluding the current day.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_LAST_N_DAYS(3)

L_NEXT_N_DAYS(n)

The following n days, including the current day.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_NEXT_N_DAYS(3)
Also available:
  • L_LAST/L_NEXT_90_DAYS

L_LAST_N_WEEKS(n)

Every day in every week, starting n weeks before current week, and ending in the previous week.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_LAST_N_WEEKS(3)

L_NEXT_N_WEEKS(n)

Every day in every week, starting the following week, and ending n weeks in the future.

  SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE MyDateField = L_NEXT_N_WEEKS(3)
Also available:
  • L_LAST/L_NEXT_N_MONTHS(n)
  • L_LAST/L_NEXT_N_QUARTERS(n)
  • L_LAST/L_NEXT_N_YEARS(n)

CData Python Connector for Box

SELECT Statements

A SELECT statement can consist of the following basic clauses.

  • SELECT
  • INTO
  • FROM
  • JOIN
  • WHERE
  • GROUP BY
  • HAVING
  • UNION
  • ORDER BY
  • LIMIT

SELECT Syntax

The following syntax diagram outlines the syntax supported by the SQL engine of the connector:

SELECT {
  [ TOP <numeric_literal> | DISTINCT ]
  { 
    * 
    | { 
        <expression> [ [ AS ] <column_reference> ] 
        | { <table_name> | <correlation_name> } .* 
      } [ , ... ] 
  }
  { 
    FROM <table_reference> [ [ AS ] <identifier> ] 
  } [ , ... ]
  [ [  
      INNER | { { LEFT | RIGHT | FULL } [ OUTER ] } 
    ] JOIN <table_reference> [ ON <search_condition> ] [ [ AS ] <identifier> ] 
  ] [ ... ] 
  [ WHERE <search_condition> ]
  [ GROUP BY <column_reference> [ , ... ]
  [ HAVING <search_condition> ]
  [ UNION [ ALL ] <select_statement> ]
  [ 
    ORDER BY 
    <column_reference> [ ASC | DESC ] [ NULLS FIRST | NULLS LAST ]
  ]
  [ 
    LIMIT <expression>
    [ 
      { OFFSET | , }
      <expression> 
    ]
  ] 
} | SCOPE_IDENTITY() 

<expression> ::=
  | <column_reference>
  | @ <parameter> 
  | ?
  | COUNT( * | { [ DISTINCT ] <expression> } )
  | { AVG | MAX | MIN | SUM | COUNT } ( <expression> ) 
  | NULLIF ( <expression> , <expression> ) 
  | COALESCE ( <expression> , ... ) 
  | CASE <expression>
      WHEN { <expression> | <search_condition> } THEN { <expression> | NULL } [ ... ]
    [ ELSE { <expression> | NULL } ]
    END 
  | {RANK() | DENSE_RANK()} OVER ([PARTITION BY <column_reference>] {ORDER BY <column_reference>})
  | <literal>
  | <sql_function> 

<search_condition> ::= 
  {
    <expression> { = | > | < | >= | <= | <> | != | LIKE | NOT LIKE | IN | NOT IN | IS NULL | IS NOT NULL | AND | OR | CONTAINS | BETWEEN | IS DISTINCT FROM | IS NOT DISTINCT FROM } [ <expression> ]
  } [ { AND | OR } ... ] 

Examples

  1. Return all columns:
    SELECT * FROM Files
  2. Rename a column:
    SELECT [Name] AS MY_Name FROM Files
  3. Cast a column's data as a different data type:
    SELECT CAST(Size AS VARCHAR) AS Str_Size FROM Files
  4. Search data:
    SELECT * FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'
  5. Return the number of items matching the query criteria:
    SELECT COUNT(*) AS MyCount FROM Files 
  6. Return the number of unique items matching the query criteria:
    SELECT COUNT(DISTINCT Name) FROM Files 
  7. Return the unique items matching the query criteria:
    SELECT DISTINCT Name FROM Files 
  8. Sort a result set in ascending order:
    SELECT Id, Name FROM Files  ORDER BY Name ASC
  9. Restrict a result set to the specified number of rows:
    SELECT Id, Name FROM Files LIMIT 10 
  10. Parameterize a query to pass in inputs at execution time. This enables you to create prepared statements and mitigate SQL injection attacks.
    SELECT * FROM Files WHERE Id = @param
See Explicitly Caching Data for information on using the SELECT statement in offline mode.

Pseudo Columns

Some input-only fields are available in SELECT statements. These fields, called pseudo columns, do not appear as regular columns in the results, yet may be specified as part of the WHERE clause. You can use pseudo columns to access additional features from Box.

    SELECT * FROM Files WHERE Pseudo = '@Pseudo'
    

Aggregate Functions

For SELECT examples using aggregate functions, see Aggregate Functions.

JOIN Queries

See JOIN Queries for SELECT query examples using JOINs.

Date Literal Functions

Date Literal Functions contains SELECT examples with date literal functions.

Window Functions

See Window Functions for SELECT examples containing window functions.

Table-Valued Functions

See Table-Valued Functions for SELECT examples with table-valued functions.

CData Python Connector for Box

Aggregate Functions

COUNT

Returns the number of rows matching the query criteria.

SELECT COUNT(*) FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'

COUNT(DISTINCT)

Returns the number of distinct, non-null field values matching the query criteria.

SELECT COUNT(DISTINCT Id) AS DistinctValues FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'

AVG

Returns the average of the column values.

SELECT Name, AVG(Size) FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'  GROUP BY Name

MIN

Returns the minimum column value.

SELECT MIN(Size), Name FROM Files WHERE Id = '123' GROUP BY Name

MAX

Returns the maximum column value.

SELECT Name, MAX(Size) FROM Files WHERE Id = '123' GROUP BY Name

SUM

Returns the total sum of the column values.

SELECT SUM(Size) FROM Files WHERE Id = '123'

CData Python Connector for Box

JOIN Queries

The CData Python Connector for Box supports standard SQL joins like the following examples.

Inner Join

An inner join selects only rows from both tables that match the join condition:

SELECT Customers.ContactName, Orders.OrderDate FROM Customers, Orders WHERE Customers.CustomerId=Orders.CustomerId

Left Join

A left join selects all rows in the FROM table and only matching rows in the JOIN table:

SELECT Customers.ContactName, Orders.OrderDate FROM Customers LEFT OUTER JOIN Orders ON Customers.CustomerId=Orders.CustomerId

CData Python Connector for Box

Window Functions

Window functions allow you to create computed fields from a group of rows (a window) that return a result for each row, as opposed to one computed result for a set of rows, as is the case with aggregate functions. The connector supports the following window function syntax.

Note: Window function support is an experimental feature of the connector. This functionality extends beyond the connector's core scope of being SQL-92 compliant. As such, performance with window functions may not be optimal.

Window Function Clauses

OVER

The OVER clause defines the window over which window functions are performed.

SELECT A, B, <window function> OVER (<window frame>) FROM TableName

The <window function> refers to any supported window function clause, and the <window frame> refers to one or more clauses that specify the logic by which the window is defined.

PARTITION BY

The PARTITION BY clause subdivides a window into sub-windows called partitions. For each unique value in the column specified in the PARTITION BY clause, every record with that value collectively forms an individual partition.

SELECT A, B, <window function> OVER (PARTITION BY A ORDER BY B) From Files

The <window function> refers to any supported window function clause.

Window Functions

The connector supports math, ranking, and analytic window functions.

Math

These window functions perform mathematical operations on the records within the window.

COUNT()

Calculates the number of records in each partition. The calculated column is of the data type "int".

In each partition, every record will display the total number of records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, COUNT() OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

COUNT_BIG()

Calculates the number of records in each partition. The calculated column is of the data type "bigint".

In each partition, every record will display the total number of records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, COUNT_BIG() OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

MIN(numeric_column)

Calculates the minimum value of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the minimum value of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, MIN(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

MAX(numeric_column)

Calculates the maximum value of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the maximum value of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, MAX(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

SUM(numeric_column)

Calculates the sum of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the sum of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, SUM(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

AVG(numeric_column)

Calculates the average value of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the average value of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, AVG(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

MEDIAN(numeric_column)

Calculates the median value of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the median value of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, MEDIAN(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

STDEV(numeric_column)

Calculates the standard deviation of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the standard deviation of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, STDEV(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

STDEVP(numeric_column)

Calculates the population standard deviation of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the population standard deviation of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, STDEVP(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

VAR(numeric_column)

Calculates the statistical standard variance of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the statistical standard variance of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, VAR(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

VARP(numeric_column)

Calculates the variance population of a numerical column per partition.

In each partition, every record will display the variance population of numeric_column across the records in that partition.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, VARP(Earnings) OVER (PARTITION BY Role) FROM Employees

Ranking

These window functions rank records that fall within the window and its partitions.

RANK()

Assigns a rank number to each record in a window based on the value of the column specified in the required ORDER BY clause.

If two or more records have an equal value in the in ranked column, they all receive the same rank number and the rank count increments internally, skipping ahead one rank number for each record with a duplicate value in the ORDER BY column.

SELECT Id, Name, RANK() OVER (ORDER BY Name) AS Rank FROM Files

If you add a PARTITION BY clause, a separate set of ranks is calculated for each partition.

SELECT Id, Name, RANK() OVER (PARTITION BY Id ORDER BY Name) AS Rank FROM Files

DENSE_RANK()

Operates like the RANK() function, but it doesn't increment the internal rank counter for each record with a duplicate value in the ranked column.

This means that, while records with identical values in the ORDER BY column still share a rank number, the function never skips a rank number.

SELECT Id, Name, DENSE_RANK() OVER (PARTITION BY Id ORDER BY Name) AS Rank FROM Files

If you add a PARTITION BY clause, a separate set of ranks is calculated for each partition.

SELECT Id, Name, DENSE_RANK() OVER (PARTITION BY Id ORDER BY Name) AS Rank FROM Files

ROW_NUMBER()

Calculates a row number for each record. An ORDER BY clause in the OVER clause is required.

SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, ROW_NUMBER() OVER (ORDER BY Role) FROM Employees
If you define multiple partitions with PARTITION BY, a new set of row numbers are calculated for each partition.
SELECT Name, Role, Earnings, ROW_NUMBER() OVER (PARTITION BY Role ORDER BY Earnings) FROM Employees

NTILE()

Distributes rows of an ordered partition into a specified number of approximately equal groups, or buckets. It assigns each group a bucket number starting from one. For each row in a group, the NTILE() function assigns a bucket number representing the group to which the row belongs.

The syntax of NTILE() is:

NTILE(buckets) OVER (
    [PARTITION BY partition_expression, ... ]
    ORDER BY sort_expression [ASC | DESC], ...
)
The following are paramaters that NTILE() supports:

  • buckets: The number of buckets into which the rows are divided. The buckets can be an expression or subquery that evaluates to a positive integer. It cannot be a window function.
  • PARTITION BY: distributes rows of a result set into partitions to which the NTILE() function is applied.
  • ORDER BY is clause that specifies the logical order of rows in each partition to which the NTILE() is applied.

If the number of rows is not divisible by the buckets, the NTILE() function returns groups of two sizes with the difference by one. The larger groups always precede the smaller group in the order set by ORDER BY in the OVER() clause.

If the total of rows is divisible by the number of buckets, the function divides the rows evenly among buckets. The following statement creates a new table named ntile_demo that stores 10 integers:

CREATE TABLE sales.ntile_demo (
	v INT NOT NULL
);
	
INSERT INTO sales.ntile_demo(v) 
VALUES(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6),(7),(8),(9),(10);	
	
SELECT * FROM sales.ntile_demo;
This statement uses the NTILE() function to divide ten rows into three groups:
SELECT 
	v, 
	NTILE (3) OVER (
		ORDER BY v
	) buckets
FROM 
	sales.ntile_demo;

Analytical

These window functions perform analytical operations on the records within the window.

PERCENT_RANK()

Calculates the relative rank SQL Percentile of each row. It returns values greater than zero, but the maximum value is one. It does not count any NULL values. This function is nondeterministic.

The syntax of PERCENT_RANK() is:

PERCENT_RANK() OVER (
      [PARTITION BY partition_expression, ... ]
      ORDER BY sort_expression [ASC | DESC], ...
  )
  
This syntax uses the following parameters.

  • PARTITION BY: By default, SQL Server treats the whole data set as a single set. You can specify the PARTITION BY clause to divide data into multiple sets. The Percent_Rank function performs the analytical calculations on each set. This parameter is optional.
  • ORDER BY: Sorts the data in either ascending or descending order. This parameter is required.

CData Python Connector for Box

Table-Valued Functions

Table-valued functions are functions that return a table (rowset).

Note: Table-valued function support is an experimental feature of the connector. This functionality extends beyond the connector's core scope of being SQL-92 compliant. As such, performance with these functions may not be optimal.

Table-Valued Function Clauses

CROSS APPLY

The CROSS APPLY operator is used to perform a subquery on each row of a table or resultset produced by a preceding table expression.

<table_expression_1> CROSS APPLY <table_expression_2>

The second table expression can reference results from the first table expression to create derived columns or an altered recordset via a table-valued function.

Each resulting record is an instance of the record it's splitting, with all the same column values, except for the column(s) containing the value split by the function.

WITH

The WITH clause is used alongside certain table-valued functions to match against constructs within the structure being split (keys, element names, attribute names, etc.) and/or to specify metadata for the columns generated from the function.
SELECT A.ColumnName, X.DerivedColumnName FROM TableName A CROSS APPLY <table-valued function> WITH (DerivedColumnName varchar(255)) AS X

Table-Valued Functions

STRING_SPLIT(input_text,delimiter)

Takes each record in the recordset of the preceding table expression, splits the column containing delimiters (input_text) into substrings separated by the delimiter, and returns one record per substring.

  • input_text: A column whose value you want to parse.
  • delimiter: The character used to split the value of the column specified in input_text.

Suppose there is a column called "SplitColumn" with the following content:

One-Two-Three
To unpack this value across multiple records:
SELECT A.ID, X.Value FROM [TableWithDelimitedStringField] A CROSS APPLY STRING_SPLIT(A.SplitColumn,'-') WITH (Value VARCHAR(255)) AS X

-- Results:
-----------
|ID|Value|
|1|One|
|1|Two|
|1|Three|

JSONTABLE(json_content,[jsonpath])

For each record in the recordset of the preceding table expression, returns one record for each instance of a key in a JSON array (json_content) that matches the key(s) specified in the WITH clause, at the scope specified by the "jsonpath" input.

  • json_content: A JSON "table" (array of objects). The contents can nest, but this must be a single JSON array, not any other JSON structure, at the root level.
    • The values of every instance of the key(s) provided in the WITH clause are retrievable only for substructures which are immediate children of the root-level JSON array.
  • jsonpath: An optional JSONPath query defining the scope, within the json_content array, that you want to pull content from. The JSON key(s) identified in the WITH clause must exist at the scope defined in this parameter. This defaults to the JSON root ($).

Consider a sample table with a single record, including an ID column and column with JSON content called "JSONColumn" with the following content:

[
	{
		"name": "Samuel",
		"email": "sam@gmail.com",
		"extrainfo": {
			"city": "Seattle"
		}
	},
	{
		"name": "Katherine",
		"email": "kat@gmail.com",
	},
	{
		"name": "George",
		"email": "george23@gmail.com",
	},
	{
		"name": "Carlos",
		"email": "carlos32@gmail.com",
	}
]

To extract all values for a certain key, specify the scope in the JSONTABLE function and provide the desired key(s) in the WITH clause.

SELECT A.ID, X.name FROM [TableWithJSONField] A CROSS APPLY JSONTABLE(A.JSONColumn) WITH (name VARCHAR(255)) AS X

-- Results: 
|ID|name|
---------
|1 |Samuel|
|1 |Katherine|
|1 |George|
|1 |Carlos|

XMLTABLE(xml_content,[xpath,child_type])

For each record in the resultset of the preceding table expression, returns one record for each of the elements and/or attributes in an XML structure (xml_content) that match the tag name(s) and/or attribute name(s) specified in the WITH clause, at the scope specified in the "xpath" input.

  • xml_content: A column containing an XML structure.
  • xpath: An optional XPath that specifies the scope within the XML structure at which the connector extracts content matching the tag/attribute name(s) specified in the WITH clause.
    • When extracting the content of sub-elements, the connector can retrieve all content from tags at the root level, (depth 0) immediate children of the root (depth 1), and children of those children (depth 2).
    • When extracting element attribute content, the connector can retrieve all content from tags containing the specified attribute at the root level (depth 0) and from immediate children of root-level elements (depth 1).
  • child_type: An optional parameter that specifies the part(s) of the parent element (specified in the xpath input) that the column(s) provided in the WITH clause are checked against to identify content.
    • You can supply the following values:
      • 0: The column(s) in the WITH clause are checked for matches against the parent element's attribute names and sub-element tag names.
      • 1: The column(s) in the WITH clause are checked for matches against the parent element's attribute names.
      • 2: The column(s) in the WITH clause are checked for matches against the parent element's sub-element tag names.
    • When not supplied, this defaults to 0.

Extracting Sub-Element Values

Consider a sample table with a single record, including an ID column and a column with XML content called "XMLContent" with the following content:
<shoppingList>
    <item>
        <name>Apples</name>
        <quantity>3</quantity>
        <unit>Kg</unit>
    </item>
    <item>
        <name>Bread</name>
        <quantity>2</quantity>
        <unit>Loaf</unit>
		<extrainfo>
			<Type>Whole-Grain</Type>
		</extrainfo>
    </item>
    <item>
        <name>Milk</name>
        <quantity>1</quantity>
        <unit>Carton</unit>
    </item>
    <item>
        <name>Eggs</name>
        <quantity>12</quantity>
        <unit></unit>
    </item>
</shoppingList>

To extract sub-element content, specify the scope in the XMLTABLE function and provide the desired element name(s) in the WITH clause. Note that this will not work if the XMLTABLE function's child_type input is set to 1.

SELECT A.ID, X.name FROM [TableWithXMLField] A CROSS APPLY XMLTABLE(A.XMLContent,'//*/item') WITH (name VARCHAR(255)) AS X

-- Results: 
|ID|name|
---------
|1|Apples|
|1|Bread|
|1|Milk|
|1|Eggs|

Extracting Values Using Element Tag Attributes

Suppose you have this sample table with a single record, including an ID column and a column with XML content called "XMLContent" with the following content:

<restaurant>
  <dish type="appetizer">
    <name lang="en">Caprese Salad</name>
    <chef>Chef Giovanni</chef>
    <price currency="USD">9.99</price>
  </dish>
  <dish type="main-course">
    <name lang="fr">Boeuf Bourguignon</name>
    <chef>Chef Marie</chef>
    <price currency="EUR">19.99</price>
  </dish>
  <dish type="dessert">
    <name lang="es">Tres Leches Cake</name>
    <chef>Chef Alejandro</chef>
    <price currency="MXN">89.99</price>
  </dish>
</restaurant>

To extract attribute content, specify the scope in the XMLTABLE function and provide the desired attribute name(s) in the WITH clause. Note that this will not work if the XMLTABLE function's child_type input is set to 2.

SELECT A.ID, X.type FROM [TableWithXMLField] A CROSS APPLY XMLTABLE(A.XMLContent,'//*/dish') WITH (type VARCHAR(255)) AS X

-- Results: 
|ID|type|
---------
|1|appetizer|
|1|main-course|
|1|dessert|

CSVTABLE(csv_content,[delimiter])

For each record in the resultset of the preceding table expression, reads from a column that contains a CSV table (csv_content) and for each record in that CSV table, returns one record containing the value of the CSV column(s) specified in the WITH clause.

  • csv_content: A column containing a CSV table.
  • delimiter: An optional custom delimiter (instead of a comma) which splits the CSV content contained in the csv_content input.

Consider a sample table with a single record, including an ID column and a column containing CSV table called "CSVContent" with the following content:

Name;Category;Price
Apple;Fruit;0.99
Spaghetti;Pasta;5.49
Chicken Breast;Meat;8.99
Broccoli;Vegetable;2.49

To select every value in the "Name" column and account for the custom delimiter (;):

SELECT A.ID, X.Name FROM [TableWithCSVField] A CROSS APPLY CSVTABLE(A.CSVContent,';') WITH (Name VARCHAR(255)) AS X

-- Results:
|ID|Name|
-----------
|1|Apple|
|1|Spaghetti|
|1|Chicken Breast|
|1|Broccoli|

CData Python Connector for Box

INSERT Statements

To create new records, use INSERT statements.

INSERT Syntax

The INSERT statement specifies the columns to be inserted and the new column values. You can specify the column values in a comma-separated list in the VALUES clause, as shown in the following example:

INSERT INTO <table_name> 
( <column_reference> [ , ... ] )
VALUES 
( { <expression> | NULL } [ , ... ] ) 
  

<expression> ::=
  | @ <parameter> 
  | ?
  | <literal>
The following is an example query:
INSERT INTO Files (Name) VALUES ('Sunset')

CData Python Connector for Box

UPDATE Statements

To modify existing records, use UPDATE statements.

Update Syntax

The UPDATE statement takes as input a comma-separated list of columns and new column values as name-value pairs in the SET clause, as shown in the following example:

UPDATE <table_name> SET <select_statement> | {<column_reference> = <expression> [ , ... ]} WHERE { Id = <expression>  } [ { AND | OR } ... ] 

<expression> ::=
  | @ <parameter> 
  | ?
  | <literal>

The following is an example query:

UPDATE Files SET Name='Sunset' WHERE Id = @myId

CData Python Connector for Box

DELETE Statements

To delete information from a table, use DELETE statements.

DELETE Syntax

The DELETE statement requires the table name in the FROM clause and the row's primary key in the WHERE clause, as shown in the following example:

<delete_statement> ::= DELETE FROM <table_name> WHERE { Id = <expression> } [ { AND | OR } ... ]

<expression> ::=
  | @ <parameter> 
  | ?
  | <literal>

The following is an example query:

DELETE FROM Files WHERE Id = @myId

CData Python Connector for Box

CACHE Statements

When caching is enabled, CACHE statements provide complete control over the data that is cached and the table to which it is cached. The CACHE statement executes the SELECT statement specified and caches its results to a table with the same name in the cache database or to table specified in <cached_table_name>. The connector updates or inserts rows to the cache depending on whether or not they already exist in the cache, so the primary key, which is used to identify existing rows, must be included in the selected columns.

See Caching Data for more information on different caching strategies.

CACHE Statement Syntax

The cache statement may include the following options that alter its behavior:

CACHE [ <cached_table_name> ] [ WITH TRUNCATE | AUTOCOMMIT | SCHEMA ONLY | DROP EXISTING | ALTER SCHEMA ] <select_statement> 

WITH TRUNCATE

If this option is set, the connector removes existing rows in the cache table before adding the selected rows. Use this option if you want to refresh the entire cache table but keep its existing schema.

AUTOCOMMIT

If this option is set, the connector commits each row individually. Use this option if you want to ignore the rows that could not be cached due to some reason. By default, the entire result set is cached as a single transaction.

DROP EXISTING

If this option is set, the connector drops the existing cache table before caching the new results. Use this option if you want to refresh the entire cache table, including its schema.

SCHEMA ONLY

If this option is set, the connector creates the cache table based on the SELECT statement without executing the query.

ALTER SCHEMA

If this option is set, the connector alters the schema of the existing table in the cache if it does not match the schema of the SELECT statement. This option results in new columns or dropped columns, if the schema of the SELECT statement does not match the cached table.

Common Queries

Use the following cache statement to cache all rows of a table:

CACHE SELECT * FROM Files

Use the following cache statement to cache all rows of a table into the cache table CachedFiles:

CACHE CachedFiles SELECT * FROM Files

Use the following cache statement for incremental caching. The DateModified column may not exist in all tables. The cache statement shows how incremental caching would work if there were such a column. Also, notice that, in this case, the WITH TRUNCATE and DROP EXISTING options are specifically omitted, which would have deleted all existing rows.

CACHE CachedFiles SELECT * FROM Files WHERE DateModified > '2013-04-04'

Use the following cache statements to create a table with all available columns that will then cache only a few of them. The sequence of statements cache only Id and Name even though the cache table CachedFiles has all the columns in Files.

CACHE CachedFiles SCHEMA ONLY SELECT * FROM Files
CACHE CachedFiles SELECT Id, Name FROM Files

CData Python Connector for Box

EXECUTE Statements

To execute stored procedures, you can use EXECUTE or EXEC statements.

EXEC and EXECUTE assign stored procedure inputs, referenced by name, to values or parameter names.

Stored Procedure Syntax

To execute a stored procedure as an SQL statement, use the following syntax:

 
{ EXECUTE | EXEC } <stored_proc_name> 
{
  [ @ ] <input_name> = <expression>
} [ , ... ]

<expression> ::=
  | @ <parameter> 
  | ?
  | <literal>

Example Statements

Reference stored procedure inputs by name:

EXECUTE my_proc @second = 2, @first = 1, @third = 3;

Execute a parameterized stored procedure statement:

EXECUTE my_proc second = @p1, first = @p2, third = @p3; 

CData Python Connector for Box

PIVOT and UNPIVOT

PIVOT and UNPIVOT can be used to change a table-valued expression into another table.

PIVOT

PIVOT rotates a table-value expression by turning unique values from one column into multiple columns in the output. PIVOT can run aggregations where required on any column value.
PIVOT Synax

 
"SELECT 'AverageCost' AS Cost_Sorted_By_Production_Days, [0], [1], [2], [3], [4]
FROM
(
SELECT DaysToManufacture, StandardCost
FROM Production.Product
) AS SourceTable
PIVOT
(
AVG(StandardCost)
FOR DaysToManufacture IN ([0], [1], [2], [3], [4])
) AS PivotTable;"

UNPIVOT

UNPIVOT carries out nearly the opposite to PIVOT by rotating columns of a table-valued expressions into column values.
UNPIVOT Sytax

 
"SELECT VendorID, Employee, Orders
FROM
(SELECT VendorID, Emp1, Emp2, Emp3, Emp4, Emp5
FROM pvt) p
UNPIVOT
(Orders FOR Employee IN
(Emp1, Emp2, Emp3, Emp4, Emp5)
)AS unpvt;"

For further information on PIVOT and UNPIVOT, see FROM clause plus JOIN, APPLY, PIVOT (Transact-SQL)

CData Python Connector for Box

Data Model

The CData Python Connector for Box models Box data as an easy-to-use SQL database. There are three parts to the data model: tables, views, and stored procedures.

Tables

The Tables section, which details standard SQL tables, and the Views section, which lists read-only SQL tables, contain samples of what you might have access to in your Box account.

Common tables include:

Table Description
Bookmarks Stores and manages bookmarks that reference web links saved within Box, allowing users to create, update, delete, and retrieve them.
Collaborations Tracks collaboration settings on Box items such as files and folders, including user roles and permissions for shared access.
Collections Displays collections of items that users have grouped together in Box for easier navigation and organization.
Comments Contains user comments made on Box files and folders, supporting creation, retrieval, updates, and deletion.
FileMetadataInstances Retrieves metadata applied to specific files, showing key-value fields associated with metadata templates.
FileVersions Lists all available versions of a file stored in Box, enabling tracking of file history and access to prior revisions.
Folders Represents folders in Box, including their structure, contents, and metadata, with full create, update, delete, and query capabilities.
Groups Manages groups of users in Box for easier collaboration and permission assignment across files and folders.
LegalPolicies Stores legal hold policies created by an enterprise to preserve content for compliance or litigation purposes.
Memberships Defines user memberships in groups, linking users to groups and managing their access within Box.
MetadataTemplates Contains reusable metadata templates that define structured fields which can be applied to files and folders.
RecentItems Shows a list of items recently accessed by the user, such as files and folders opened in Box.
SharedItems Retrieves items that have been shared, including their shared links and associated access permissions.
SignRequests Lists electronic signature requests sent or received through Box Sign, including request status.
TaskAssignments Represents assignments of tasks within Box, linking a task to the users responsible for completing it.
Tasks Stores tasks created in Box for files and folders, supporting assignment, due dates, and completion tracking.
TrashedItems Contains items moved to the trash, allowing users to view, query, or permanently delete trashed files and folders.
UserEvents Provides a record of user activity events in Box, such as logins, file uploads, shares, and collaborations.
Users Stores user account details in Box, supporting creation, management, and retrieval of users across the enterprise.

Stored Procedures

Stored Procedures are actions that are invoked via SQL queries. They perform tasks beyond standard create, read, update, delete (CRUD) operations, including downloading, uploading, and copying files.

CData Python Connector for Box

Limit and Offset Handling

When they are specified in the SQL statement, the connector tries to push LIMIT and OFFSET clauses to the server where possible. However, the maximum supported value for LIMIT is 1000.

Some tables do not offer support for LIMIT and OFFSET clauses. For these tables and when the global search endpoint is hit, these clauses are evaluated client-side.

CData Python Connector for Box

Dynamic Collection Views

You can use ExposeCollectionViews to expose your Box collections as separate views and query the metadata information of their files and folders. The generated view names are prefixed with Collection_.

You can also use AsUserId to expose the collections of a specific user and IncludeCustomFields to expose custom metadata fields as columns on the generated views.

CData Python Connector for Box

Tables

The connector models the data in Box as a list of tables in a relational database that can be queried using standard SQL statements.

CData Python Connector for Box Tables

Name Description
Bookmarks Stores and manages bookmarks that reference web links saved within Box, allowing users to create, update, delete, and retrieve them.
Collaborations Tracks collaboration settings on Box items such as files and folders, including user roles and permissions for shared access.
Comments Contains user comments made on Box files and folders, supporting creation, retrieval, updates, and deletion.
Folders Represents folders in Box, including their structure, contents, and metadata, with full create, update, delete, and query capabilities.
Groups Manages groups of users in Box for easier collaboration and permission assignment across files and folders.
LegalPolicies Stores legal hold policies created by an enterprise to preserve content for compliance or litigation purposes.
Memberships Defines user memberships in groups, linking users to groups and managing their access within Box.
MetadataTemplates Contains reusable metadata templates that define structured fields which can be applied to files and folders.
TaskAssignments Represents assignments of tasks within Box, linking a task to the users responsible for completing it.
Tasks Stores tasks created in Box for files and folders, supporting assignment, due dates, and completion tracking.
TrashedItems Contains items moved to the trash, allowing users to view, query, or permanently delete trashed files and folders.
Users Stores user account details in Box, supporting creation, management, and retrieval of users across the enterprise.

CData Python Connector for Box

Bookmarks

Stores and manages bookmarks that reference web links saved within Box, allowing users to create, update, delete, and retrieve them.

Table Specific Information

Select

If you query Bookmarks without specifying any condition in the WHERE Clause, only bookmarks up to 5 levels deep from the root folder are returned by default. You can change the default depth value in the connection string (for example, DirectoryRetrievalDepth=10).

SELECT * FROM Bookmarks;

By default, the search starts from the root directory, identified as directory '0'. To customize the starting directory for your search, specify its Id using the SearchRootId column.

SELECT * FROM Bookmarks WHERE SearchRootId = '293533136411';

Retrieve a bookmark by specifying the Id:

SELECT * FROM Bookmarks WHERE Id = '8397822180';

To search all the bookmarks in your enterprise, query the Bookmarks table with the Search Terms column.

SELECT * FROM Bookmarks WHERE SearchTerms = 'CData' AND OwnerUserIds = '311997108,1';

To search all the bookmarks within a specific folder, query the Bookmarks table with the ParentId column.

SELECT * FROM Bookmarks WHERE ParentId = 62297447480;

Note: When using a ParentId filter, avoid specifying a SearchRootId simultaneously. If both are used, the search will recursively start from the specified SearchRootId instead of the ParentId, which may result in slower performance.

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query bookmarks from multiple user accounts:

SELECT * FROM Bookmarks WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query bookmarks associated with their account.
  • Bookmarks shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

To insert a bookmark you must specify at least the URL and ParentId column.

INSERT INTO Bookmarks (Url, Name, Description, ParentId) VALUES ('https://www.cdata.com/', 'CData', 'Visit CData!', 0);

Update

Any column where ReadOnly=False can be updated.

UPDATE Bookmarks SET Name = 'CData Updated Bookmark', ParentId = 62297447480  WHERE Id = 8397822180;

Delete

Delete a bookmark by specifying its Id. This bookmark is then moved to TrashedItems.

DELETE FROM Bookmarks WHERE Id = 8397822180;

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the bookmark within Box.

Url String False

The web address the bookmark points to, used to link to external resources.

Name String False

The display name given to the bookmark.

Description String False

A user-provided description of the bookmark's purpose or content.

ParentId String False

Identifier of the folder that contains the bookmark, defining its location in Box.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the bookmark was originally created in Box.

CreatedById String True

Identifier of the user who created the bookmark.

CreatedByName String True

The full name of the user who created the bookmark.

CreatedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who created the bookmark.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the bookmark was last updated.

ModifiedById String True

Identifier of the user who last modified the bookmark.

ModifiedByName String True

The full name of the user who last modified the bookmark.

ModifiedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who last modified the bookmark.

OwnedById String True

Identifier of the user who owns the bookmark.

OwnedByName String True

The full name of the user who owns the bookmark.

OwnedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who owns the bookmark.

Etag String True

Version identifier for the bookmark used to detect changes and manage concurrency.

SequenceId String True

An incremental identifier representing the version sequence of the bookmark.

SharedLink String True

A shareable URL generated to provide access to the bookmark.

ItemStatus String True

The current state of the bookmark, such as active or trashed.

Path String True

The full folder path leading to the bookmark within the Box hierarchy.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate when making API calls, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

SearchRootId String True

The folder identifier that defines the starting point for recursive searches, with '0' indicating the root folder.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
SearchTerms String

Keywords used to search bookmarks stored in Box.

Scope String

The scope of the search, such as limiting results to a user or enterprise.

The allowed values are user_content, enterprise_content.

OwnerUserIDs String

A list of user identifiers separated by a comma, used to restrict searches to bookmarks owned by specific users.

AncestorFolderIDs String

A list of folder identifiers separated by a comma, used to restrict searches to bookmarks contained within specific folders.

CData Python Connector for Box

Collaborations

Tracks collaboration settings on Box items such as files and folders, including user roles and permissions for shared access.

Table Specific Information

Collaborations are connections between Box items (files and folders) and Groups or Users. For example, one Group can collaborate on a specific Folder, or a User can be granted access to a specific File.

Select

When selecting from the Collaborations table, you must specify Id, FileId, FolderId, or GroupId in the WHERE clause.

SELECT * FROM Collaborations WHERE Id = '62696811616';

To retrieve collaborations for a specific file:

SELECT * FROM Collaborations WHERE FileId = '12345678';

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query collaborations from multiple user accounts.

SELECT * FROM Collaborations WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query collaborations associated with their account.
  • Collaborations shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

To insert into Collaborations, connect a Folder with a Group or a User and assign a Role to them.

INSERT INTO Collaborations (Role, ItemId, ItemType, AccessibleById, AccessibleByType) VALUES ('admin', '1', 'folder', '2', 'user');

Update

You can only update the Role and Status columns.

UPDATE Collaborations SET Role = 'viewer', Status = 'accepted' WHERE Id = '100';

Delete

Delete a collaboration by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM Collaborations WHERE Id = '100';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the collaboration record in Box.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the collaboration was originally created.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the collaboration was last updated.

AcknowledgedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the invited collaborator acknowledged or accepted the collaboration.

ExpiresAt Datetime False

The date and time when the collaboration expires.

IsAccessOnly Boolean True

Indicates whether the collaboration grants access only, without allowing the collaborator to see other collaborations on the item.

CreatedById String True

Identifier of the user who created the collaboration invitation.

CreatedByName String True

The full name of the user who created the collaboration.

CreatedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who created the collaboration.

Status String False

The current state of the collaboration, such as pending, accepted, or rejected.

Role String False

The permission level granted to the collaborator. Allowed values are editor, viewer, previewer, uploader, previewer uploader, viewer uploader, co-owner, or owner.

ItemId String False

Identifier of the file or folder that the collaboration is associated with.

ItemType String False

Specifies whether the collaboration is tied to a file or a folder.

ItemName String True

The name of the file or folder associated with the collaboration.

AccessibleById String False

Identifier of the user or group that has been granted access through the collaboration.

AccessibleByType String False

The type of collaborator entity associated with AccessibleById, such as user or group.

The allowed values are group, user.

AccessibleByLogin String False

The login email of the user or group associated with AccessibleById.

AccessibleByName String True

The full name of the user or group granted access through this collaboration.

AccessibleByIsActive Boolean True

Indicates whether the user or group granted access through this collaboration is active.

InviteEmail String True

The email address of an invited collaborator who is not yet registered in Box.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only to Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
FolderId String

Identifier of a folder used to filter collaborations related to that folder.

GroupId String

Identifier of a group used to filter collaborations related to that group.

FileId String

Identifier of a file used to filter collaborations related to that file.

CData Python Connector for Box

Comments

Contains user comments made on Box files and folders, supporting creation, retrieval, updates, and deletion.

Table Specific Information

Comments are additional information passed on to a File. These Comments can also have child Comments.

Select

When selecting from the Collaborations table, you must specify the Id or FileId in the WHERE clause.

SELECT * FROM Comments WHERE Id = '1925314736840';

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query comments from multiple user accounts.

SELECT * FROM Comments WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query comments associated with their account.
  • Comments shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

To insert into Comments, specify the item to insert the Comment into, as well as the Message. Either a Message or a TaggedMessage must be specified, but not both.

INSERT INTO Comments (ItemId, ItemType, Message) VALUES ('1', 'file', 'example comment');

Update

You can only update the message of the Comment.

UPDATE Comments SET Message = 'editor' WHERE Id = '100';

Delete

Delete a comment by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM Comments WHERE Id = '100';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the comment.

Message String False

The plain text content of the comment. Either this or TaggedMessage must be used, but not both.

TaggedMessage String False

The formatted message of the comment that supports tagging users with @[USER_ID:USERNAME], which notifies the tagged user. An invalid tag format results in an error.

ItemId String False

Identifier of the item that the comment is attached to, such as a file or another comment.

ItemType String False

Specifies the type of item the comment is associated with, which can be a file or another comment.

The allowed values are file, comment.

CreatedById String True

Identifier of the user who authored the comment.

CreatedByName String True

The full name of the user who authored the comment.

CreatedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who authored the comment.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the comment was created.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API calls, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
FileID String

Identifier of the file the comment is linked to. This field is only for querying and cannot be used when inserting comments.

CData Python Connector for Box

Files

Represents files stored in Box, including their content, metadata, ownership, and lifecycle information.

Table Specific Information

Select

If you query Files without specifying any condition in the WHERE Clause, only files up to 5 levels deep from the root folder are returned by default. You can change the default depth value in the connection string (for example, DirectoryRetrievalDepth=10).

SELECT * FROM Files;

By default, the search starts from the root directory, identified as directory '0'. To customize the starting directory for your search, specify its Id using the SearchRootId column.

SELECT * FROM Files WHERE SearchRootId = '293533136411';

To search all the Files in your enterprise, query the Files table with the SearchTerms column.

SELECT * FROM Files WHERE SearchTerms = 'untitled';

To search all the Files within a specific folder, query the Files table with a filter on the relevant folder's Id in the ParentId column.

SELECT * FROM Files WHERE ParentId = '12';

Note: When using a ParentId filter, avoid specifying a SearchRootId simultaneously. If both are used, the search will recursively start from the specified SearchRootId instead of the ParentId, which may result in slower performance.

Update

Any column where ReadOnly=False can be updated.

UPDATE Files SET Description = 'example description', Sharedlink = 'http://sharedlink.com', OwnedbyId = '321', ParentId = '12', Name = 'updated file name' WHERE Id = '123';

Delete

Delete a file by specifying its Id. This file is then moved to TrashedItems.

DELETE FROM Files WHERE Id = '100';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
SearchTerms String True

Keywords used to search for files stored in Box.

Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the file.

Name String False

The display name of the file.

Sha1 String False

The SHA-1 checksum of the file, used for content verification and deduplication.

Etag String False

Version identifier for the file, used to track changes and manage concurrency.

SequenceId String False

An incremental identifier representing the version sequence of the file.

Description String False

A user-provided description that explains the file's purpose or contents.

Size Integer True

The file size in bytes.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the file was originally created in Box.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the file was last updated in Box.

TrashedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the file was moved to the trash.

PurgedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the file was permanently deleted from the trash.

ContentCreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the file content was first created, which may differ from the Box creation date.

ContentModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the file content itself was last modified.

CreatedById String True

Identifier of the user who created the file.

CreatedByName String True

The full name of the user who created the file.

CreatedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who created the file.

SharedLink String False

A shareable URL that provides access to the file.

ModifiedById String True

Identifier of the user who most recently modified the file.

ModifiedByName String True

The full name of the user who most recently modified the file.

ModifiedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who most recently modified the file.

OwnedById String False

Identifier of the user who owns the file.

OwnedByName String False

The full name of the user who owns the file.

OwnedByLogin String False

The login email of the user who owns the file.

ParentId String False

Identifier of the folder that contains the file.

ItemStatus String False

The current state of the file, such as active or trashed.

Path String True

The full folder path leading to the file within the Box hierarchy.

SearchRootId String True

Identifier of the folder to use as the starting point for recursive searches, with '0' representing the root folder.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
Scope String

The scope of the file search, such as limiting results to a user or enterprise.

FileExtension String

The file's extension, such as PDF or DOCX.

ContentTypes String

Specifies which file fields to search against, separated by commas. Possible values include name, file_content, description, comments, and tags.

OwnerUserIDs String

A list of user identifiers separated by a comma, used to restrict searches to files owned by specific users.

AncestorfolderIDs String

A list of folder identifiers separated by a comma, used to restrict searches to files contained within specific folders.

AsUserId String

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

Folders

Represents folders in Box, including their structure, contents, and metadata, with full create, update, delete, and query capabilities.

Table Specific Information

Select

If you query Folders without specifying any condition in the WHERE Clause, only files up to 5 levels deep from the root folder are returned by default. You can change the default depth value in the connection string; e.g. DirectoryRetrievalDepth=10.

SELECT * FROM Folders;

By default, the search starts from the root directory, identified as directory '0'. To customize the starting directory for your search, specify its Id using the SearchRootId column.

SELECT * FROM Folders WHERE SearchRootId = '293533136411';

To search all the Folders in your enterprise, query the Folders table with the SearchTerms column.

SELECT * FROM Folders WHERE SearchTerms = 'untitled';

To search all the Folders within a specific folder, query the Folders table with the ParentId column.

SELECT * FROM Folders WHERE ParentId = '12';

Note: When using a ParentId filter, avoid specifying a SearchRootId simultaneously. If both are used, the search will recursively start from the specified SearchRootId instead of the ParentId, which may result in slower performance.

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query folders from multiple user accounts:

SELECT * FROM Folders WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query folders associated with their account.
  • Folders shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

You must specify the name of the Folder and also the Id of the parent Folder. Use 0 for the root Folder's ParentId.

INSERT INTO Folders (Name, ParentId, SharedLink, Description, Access, OwnedById) VALUES ('new folder', '0', 'http://sharedlink.com', 'example desc', 'open', '123');

Update

Any column where ReadOnly=False can be updated.

UPDATE Folders SET Description = 'example description', Access = 'open', SharedLink = 'http://sharedlink.com', OwnedById = '321', ParentId = '12', Name = 'no longer new folder'  WHERE Id = '123';

Delete

Delete a folder by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM Folders WHERE Id = '123';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
SearchTerms String True

Keywords used to search for folders stored in Box.

Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the folder.

Name String False

The display name of the folder.

Etag String True

Version identifier for the folder, used to detect changes and manage concurrency.

SequenceId String True

An incremental identifier representing the version sequence of the folder.

Description String False

A user-provided description that explains the purpose or contents of the folder.

Access String False

The email addresses of users who have been granted access to the folder.

The allowed values are open, collaborators.

Size Integer True

The total size of the folder contents, measured in bytes.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the folder was originally created in Box.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the folder's metadata or contents were last updated.

TrashedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the folder was moved to the trash.

PurgedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the folder was permanently deleted from the trash.

ContentCreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the first content item inside the folder was created.

ContentModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the most recent content inside the folder was modified.

CreatedBy String True

Identifier of the user who created the folder.

CreatedByName String True

The full name of the user who created the folder.

CreatedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who created the folder.

SharedLink String False

A shareable URL that provides access to the folder.

ModifiedBy String True

Identifier of the user who last modified the folder.

ModifiedByName String True

The full name of the user who last modified the folder.

ModifiedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who last modified the folder.

OwnedById String False

Identifier of the user who owns the folder.

OwnedByName String True

The full name of the user who owns the folder.

OwnedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who owns the folder.

ParentId String False

Identifier of the parent folder that contains this folder.

ItemStatus String True

The current state of the folder, such as active or trashed.

Path String True

The full folder path leading to the folder within the Box hierarchy.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

SearchRootId String True

Identifier of the folder to use as the starting point for recursive searches, with '0' representing the root folder.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
Scope String

The scope of the folder search, such as limiting results to a user or enterprise.

ContentTypes String

Specifies which folder-related fields to search against, separated by commas. Possible values include name, file_content, description, comments, and tags.

OwnerUserIDs String

A list of user identifiers separated by a comma, used to restrict searches to folders owned by specific users.

AncestorfolderIDs String

A list of folder identifiers separated by a comma, used to restrict searches to folders contained within specific parent folders.

CData Python Connector for Box

Groups

Manages groups of users in Box for easier collaboration and permission assignment across files and folders.

Table Specific Information

Select

You can retrieve all the Groups or filter them by Id.

SELECT * FROM Groups;

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query groups from multiple user accounts:

SELECT * FROM Groups WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query groups associated with their account.
  • Groups shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

Only the Name column is required to create a Group.

INSERT INTO Groups (Name, Provenance, MemberViewabilityLevel) VALUES ('new group', 'google', 'admins_only');

Update

Any column where ReadOnly=False can be updated.

UPDATE Groups SET InvitabilityLevel = 'admins_and_members' WHERE Id = '111';

Delete

Delete a group by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM Groups WHERE Id = '111';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
ID [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the group.

Name String False

The display name of the group.

Provenance String False

Tracks the external system or source from which the group originated, often used for integration purposes.

ExternalSyncIdentifier String False

An identifier used to map the group to an external system when groups are synchronized from outside sources.

Description String False

A user-provided description that explains the purpose or membership of the group.

InvitabilityLevel String False

Defines who is allowed to invite this group to collaborate on folders, such as admins only or all group members.

MemberViewabilityLevel String False

Defines who is allowed to view the membership of the group, such as only admins or all collaborators.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the group was originally created. An Id must be specified to retrieve this field.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the group's details were last updated. An Id must be specified to retrieve this field.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

LegalPolicies

Stores legal hold policies created by an enterprise to preserve content for compliance or litigation purposes.

Table Specific Information

Note: The Legal Hold feature must be enabled for a Box enterprise account to query this table. To add this feature, please visit Box Governance and Compliance.

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String False

Unique identifier assigned to the legal hold policy.

AssignmentFileCount Integer True

The number of files currently under this legal hold policy.

AssignmentFileVersionCount Integer True

The number of file versions assigned to this legal hold policy.

AssignmentFolderCount Integer True

The number of folders covered by this legal hold policy.

AssignmentUserCount Integer True

The number of users assigned to this legal hold policy.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the legal hold policy was created.

CreatedById String True

Identifier of the user who created the legal hold policy.

CreatedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who created the legal hold policy.

CreatedByName String True

The full name of the user who created the legal hold policy.

CreatedByType String True

Specifies the type of user or account that created the policy, such as a user or service account.

DeletedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the legal hold policy was deleted, if applicable.

Description String False

A user-provided description of the legal hold policy and its intended purpose.

FilterEndedAt Datetime False

The end date and time of the policy's filter criteria, used to define the retention window.

FilterStartedAt Datetime False

The start date and time of the policy's filter criteria, used to define the retention window.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the legal hold policy was last updated.

PolicyName String False

The display name of the legal hold policy.

ReleaseNotes String False

Notes provided when the policy was released, describing the reason or details of the release.

Status String True

The current state of the policy, such as active or released.

Type String True

Specifies the type of policy, such as legal hold or another retention category.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

IsOngoing Boolean False

Indicates whether the policy should continue applying to new assignments created after its initialization.

CData Python Connector for Box

Memberships

Defines user memberships in groups, linking users to groups and managing their access within Box.

Table Specific Information

Memberships are the relations between a User and a Group.

Select

When selecting from the Memberships table, you must specify Id, GroupId, or UserId in the WHERE clause.

SELECT * FROM Memberships WHERE Id = '24201762883';

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query memberships from multiple user accounts. For example:

SELECT * FROM Memberships WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query memberships associated with their account.
  • Memberships shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

To insert into Memberships, connect a Group (GroupId) with a User (UserId).

INSERT INTO Memberships (GroupId, UserId) VALUES (1001, 123);

Update

You can only update the role of Memberships. The default role is 'memberships' with the option for 'admin'.

UPDATE Memberships SET Role = 'admin' WHERE Id = '100';

Delete

Delete a membership by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM Memberships  WHERE Id = '100'

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the membership record.

Role String False

The role granted to the user within the group, such as member or admin.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the membership was created. Requires an Id to retrieve this field.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the membership was last updated. Requires an Id to retrieve this field.

UserName String True

The full name of the user who is part of the membership.

UserLogin String True

The login email of the user who is part of the membership.

UserId String False

Identifier of the user associated with the membership.

GroupName String False

The display name of the group that the membership belongs to.

GroupId String False

Identifier of the group that the membership is associated with.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

MetadataTemplates

Contains reusable metadata templates that define structured fields which can be applied to files and folders.

Table Specific Information

Select

You can retrieve information about the Metadata Template.

SELECT * FROM MetadataTemplates;

You can also retrieve the information of any Template in your enterprise:

SELECT * FROM MetadataTemplates WHERE Id = 'e93746cc-03f6-4dee-ab45-01834989950c';

Insert

You can insert Metadata Template for your enterprise.

Insert a single field to the Template.

INSERT INTO MetadataTemplates (DisplayName, Scope, FieldsDisplayName, FieldsType) VALUES ('TestTemplate', 'enterprise', 'TestField', 'string');

Insert multiple fields to the Template.

INSERT INTO MetadataFields#TEMP (FieldDisplayName, FieldType, FieldOptions) VALUES ('Industry', 'enum', 'Technology, HealthCare');
INSERT INTO MetadataFields#TEMP (FieldDisplayName, FieldType) VALUES ('Contact Role', 'string');

INSERT INTO MetadataTemplates (DisplayName, Scope, FieldsAggregate) VALUES ('TestTemplate', 'enterprise', 'MetadataFields#TEMP');

Update

Add field to the existing Template.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'addField', FieldsKey = 'category', FieldsDisplayName = 'Category', FieldsisHidden = false, FieldsType = 'string' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Update Fields in the Template.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'editField', FieldsKey = 'Category', FieldsDescription = 'The Product Category' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Reorder Fields in the Template.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'reorderFields', FieldsKey = 'Category,Industry,Contact' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Remove Fields from the Template.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'removeField', FieldsKey = 'Industry' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Add Enum Options to the EnumField.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'addEnumOption', FieldsKey = 'Industry', EnumOptionKey = 'AL' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Reorder Enum Options in the EnumField.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'reorderEnumOptions', FieldsKey = 'industry', EnumOptionKey = 'AL,AK,AR,N/A' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Update Enum Options in the EnumField. Specify Present value, New value in the EnumOption column, separated with comma.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'editEnumOption', FieldsKey = 'industry', EnumOptionKey = 'N/A,Outside USA' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Remove Enum Options from the EnumField.

UPDATE MetadataTemplates SET Op = 'removeEnumOption', FieldsKey = 'industry', EnumOptionKey = 'Outside USA' WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Delete

Delete metadata templates by specifying Scope and TemplateKey.

DELETE FROM MetadataTemplates WHERE Scope = 'enterprise' AND TemplateKey = 'TestTemplate';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the metadata template.

TemplateKey String False

A unique key that identifies the metadata template within the enterprise. This key is unique inside a single enterprise but might differ across enterprises.

CopyInstanceOnItemCopy Boolean False

Indicates whether metadata applied to a file or folder should be copied when the item itself is copied.

DisplayName String False

The user-friendly name of the metadata template as shown in the Box web and mobile apps.

FieldsId [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to a specific field within the metadata template.

FieldsKey String False

A unique key for the field within its metadata template, required to distinguish it from other fields.

FieldsDisplayName String False

The display name of the field as shown to users in the Box web and mobile apps.

FieldsType String False

The type of the metadata field, such as string, enum, or multiSelect.

FieldsDescription String False

A description of the metadata field's purpose or usage.

FieldsisHidden Boolean False

Indicates whether the field is hidden in the user interface and can only be set programmatically through the API.

FieldsOptions String False

A list of allowed options for the field, used with enum and multiSelect field types.

TemplateisHidden Boolean False

Indicates whether the template is visible in the Box web application or restricted to API usage only.

Scope String False

Defines the scope of the template, such as enterprise-wide or global.

Type String True

The object type for the template. This value is always metadata_template.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
Op String

Specifies the type of change to apply to the template, such as add or remove. Some changes might alter existing templates and should be used with caution.

The allowed values are editTemplate, addField, reorderFields, addEnumOption, reorderEnumOptions, reorderMultiSelectOptions, addMultiSelectOption, editField, removeField, editEnumOption, removeEnumOption, editMultiSelectOption, removeMultiSelectOption.

EnumOptionKey String

Used in update operations to define the keys of the enum options that are affected.

MultiSelectOptionKey String

Used in update operations to define the keys of the multi-select options that are affected.

FieldsAggregate String

Allows inserting multiple fields into a template at once. Accepted columns include FieldsDisplayName, FieldsType, FieldsDescription, FieldsKey, FieldsisHidden, and FieldsOptions.

CData Python Connector for Box

TaskAssignments

Represents assignments of tasks within Box, linking a task to the users responsible for completing it.

Table Specific Information

Task Assignments are Tasks assigned to a specific User.

Select

When selecting from the Task Assignments table, you must specify Id or TaskId in the WHERE clause.

SELECT * FROM TaskAssignments WHERE Id = '35991959268';

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query task assignments from multiple user accounts. For example:

SELECT * FROM TaskAssignments WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query task assignments associated with their account.
  • Task assignments shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

To insert into Task Assignments, connect a Task (TaskId) with a User (AssignedToId).

INSERT INTO TaskAssignments (TaskId, AssignedToId) VALUES (1001, 123);

Update

You can only update the Message of the Task Assignment or its ResolutionState.

UPDATE TaskAssignments SET Message = 'x', ResolutionState = 'completed' WHERE Id = '111';

Delete

Delete task assignments by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM TaskAssignments WHERE Id = '111';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the task assignment.

TaskId String False

Identifier of the task that is being assigned.

AssignedToId String False

Identifier of the user who has been assigned to complete the task.

AssignedToName String False

The full name of the user who has been assigned the task.

AssignedToLogin String False

The login email of the user who has been assigned the task.

ItemType String False

Specifies the type of item associated with the task assignment, such as a file or folder.

ItemId String False

Identifier of the item associated with the task assignment.

ItemName String False

The display name of the item associated with the task assignment.

Message String False

The note or instructions attached to the task assignment.

AssignedById String False

Identifier of the user who created and assigned the task.

AssignedByName String False

The full name of the user who created and assigned the task.

AssignedByLogin String False

The login email of the user who created and assigned the task.

AssignedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the task was assigned.

RemindedAt Datetime True

The date and time when a reminder for the task was sent.

CompletedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the task was marked as completed.

ResolutionState String False

The current status of the task assignment, indicating whether it has been addressed or remains unresolved.

The allowed values are completed, incomplete, approved, rejected.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

Tasks

Stores tasks created in Box for files and folders, supporting assignment, due dates, and completion tracking.

Table Specific Information

Tasks are jobs that are waiting to be assigned to someone. These tasks are related to an item, which generally is a File.

Select

When selecting from the Tasks table, you must specify Id or ItemId in the WHERE clause.

SELECT * FROM Tasks WHERE ItemId = '1925314736840';

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query tasks from multiple user accounts.

SELECT * FROM Tasks WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query tasks associated with their account.
  • Tasks shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

ItemId is required to insert into Tasks table. Currently, Box API supports only file as type of the item the task is for.

INSERT INTO Tasks (ItemId, ItemType, Action, Message) VALUES (1001, 'file', 'review', 'message');

Update

The Message is required to perform an UPDATE to a specific task. Also, the Action and DueAt columns can be updated as well. The Action column is only able to take a 'review' value.

UPDATE Tasks SET Message = 'updated message', Action = 'review', DueAt = '2016-05-14' WHERE ID = '100'; 

Delete

Delete a task by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM Tasks WHERE Id = '100';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the task.

DueAt Datetime False

The date and time when the task is due for completion.

ItemId String False

Identifier of the item the task is associated with, such as a file or folder.

ItemType String False

Specifies the type of item the task is linked to, such as a file or folder.

Action String False

The required action for the task assignee, such as reviewing, approving, or completing an item.

Message String False

An optional message or instruction included with the task to provide context for the assignee.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the task was created.

CreatedById String True

Identifier of the user who created the task.

CreatedByName String True

The full name of the user who created the task.

CreatedByLogin String True

The login email of the user who created the task.

IsCompleted Boolean False

Indicates whether the task has been marked as completed.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

TrashedItems

Contains items moved to the trash, allowing users to view, query, or permanently delete trashed files and folders.

Table Specific Information

Trashed Items are Files and Folders that have been deleted. This table supports only two operations: Select and Delete. Deleting from this table permanently deletes the File and is not recoverable.

Select

To search in the Trashed Items table for a specific item, specify the type of item (File, Folder, or WEB_LINK).

SELECT * FROM TrashedItems WHERE SearchTerms = 'Untitled' AND Type = 'file';

To query a single-deleted Folder, you can execute a query like the following:

SELECT * FROM TrashedItems WHERE Id = '123' AND Type = 'folder';

To query a single-deleted WEB_LINK, you can execute a query like the following:

SELECT * FROM TrashedItems WHERE Id = '123' AND Type = 'web_link';

Delete

Delete trashed items by specifying the Id and the Type of item.

DELETE FROM TrashedItems WHERE Id = 'abc123' AND Type = 'file';

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
SearchTerms String False

A query string used to search across trashed items.

Id [KEY] String False

The unique identifier of the trashed item.

Name String False

The name of the trashed item.

Type String False

The type of trashed item, such as file, folder, or web_link.

Sha1 String False

The SHA-1 hash of the trashed item for file integrity verification.

Etag String False

The entity tag of the trashed item used for version control.

SequenceId String False

The sequence Id of the trashed item, used for internal ordering and version tracking.

Description String False

The description or notes about the trashed item.

Size Int64 False

The size of the trashed item in bytes.

CreatedAt Datetime False

The date and time when the trashed item was originally created.

ModifiedAt Datetime False

The date and time when the trashed item was last modified.

TrashedAt Datetime False

The date and time when the item was moved to the trash.

PurgedAt Datetime False

The date and time when the item was permanently deleted from the trash.

ContentCreatedAt Datetime False

The date and time when the content of the item was originally created.

ContentModifiedAt Datetime False

The date and time when the content of the item was last modified.

CreatedById String False

The Id of the user who created the trashed item.

CreatedByName String False

The name of the user who created the trashed item.

CreatedByLogin String False

The login of the user who created the trashed item.

SharedLink String False

The shared link associated with the trashed item, if one exists.

ModifiedBy String False

The Id of the user who last modified the trashed item.

ModifiedByName String False

The name of the user who last modified the trashed item.

ModifiedByLogin String False

The login of the user who last modified the trashed item.

OwnedById String False

The Id of the user who owns the trashed item.

OwnedByName String False

The name of the user who owns the trashed item.

OwnedByLogin String False

The login of the user who owns the trashed item.

ParentId String False

The Id of the parent folder containing the trashed item.

ItemStatus String False

The current status of the trashed item, such as active, trashed, or purged.

AsUserId String False

The Id of the user you want to impersonate. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
Scope String

Defines the scope of the search, such as enterprise or user-specific.

FileExtension String

The file extension of the trashed item, if applicable.

SearchContent String

Specifies which parts of the item to search (such as name, description, or content), separated by commas.

CData Python Connector for Box

Users

Stores user account details in Box, supporting creation, management, and retrieval of users across the enterprise.

Table Specific Information

Note: Authenticated users must have permission to look up users in the entire Box enterprise.

Select

You can retrieve information about the current User, a User in your enterprise specified by Id, or all the Users in the enterprise.

SELECT * FROM Users;

You can also retrieve the information of any User who is in your enterprise:

SELECT * FROM Users WHERE Id = '1';

To retrieve the details of the currently authenticated user use the FetchOnlyAuthenticatedUser pseudo-column:

SELECT Id, Login, Name, SpaceUsed, SpaceAmount FROM Users WHERE FetchOnlyAuthenticatedUser = TRUE

Note: When set to TRUE, it calls the Box

/users/me
endpoint and returns a single row for the authenticated user.

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query users from multiple user accounts:

SELECT * FROM Users WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query users associated with their account.
  • Users shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Insert

You can invite a User to your enterprise. The following query will send an invitation email to join your enterprise:

INSERT INTO Users (Login, Name, Role) VALUES ('Email@test.com', 'Username', 'coadmin');

Update

Any column where ReadOnly=False can be updated.

UPDATE Users SET Name = 'Test', Role = 'user', IsExemptFromDeviceLimits = false WHERE Id = '111';

Delete

Delete users by specifying its Id:

DELETE FROM Users WHERE Id = '111'

Columns

Name Type ReadOnly Description
Id [KEY] String True

Unique identifier assigned to the user. When querying, this can be set to the value 'me' to return details for the currently authenticated user.

Login String False

The login email address of the user.

Name String False

The full display name of the user.

EnterpriseId String False

Identifier of the enterprise the user belongs to. Can be set to null to disassociate the user from the enterprise.

Role String False

The user's role within the enterprise, such as admin, co-admin, or user.

Language String False

The preferred language setting for the user interface.

IsPlatformAccessOnly Boolean False

Indicates whether the account is a Box app user without full standard access.

IsSyncEnabled Boolean False

Indicates whether the user is allowed to use Box Sync for offline file access.

JobTitle String False

The job title provided for the user.

Phone String False

The phone number associated with the user.

Address String False

The mailing address of the user.

SpaceAmount Long False

The total storage space allocated to the user, measured in bytes.

SpaceUsed Long False

The amount of storage space the user has consumed, measured in bytes.

MaxUploadSize Long False

The maximum file size the user is allowed to upload, measured in bytes.

TrackingCodes String False

Custom tracking codes associated with the user, separated by commas.

CanSeeManagedUsers Boolean False

Indicates whether the user has permission to view other managed users in the enterprise.

TimeZone String False

The preferred time zone setting for the user.

IsExemptFromDeviceLimits Boolean False

Indicates whether the user is exempt from restrictions on the number of devices linked to their account.

IsExemptFromLoginVerification Boolean False

Indicates whether the user is exempt from login verification requirements, such as two-step authentication.

Status String False

The current status of the user account, such as active, inactive, or deleted.

IsPasswordResetRequired Boolean False

Indicates whether the user must reset their password on the next login.

CreatedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the user account was created.

ModifiedAt Datetime True

The date and time when the user account was last updated.

AsUserId String False

Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

Views

Views are similar to tables in the way that data is represented; however, views are read-only.

Queries can be executed against a view as if it were a normal table.

CData Python Connector for Box Views

Name Description
Collections Displays collections of items that users have grouped together in Box for easier navigation and organization.
FileMetadataInstances Retrieves metadata applied to specific files, showing key-value fields associated with metadata templates.
FileVersions Lists all available versions of a file stored in Box, enabling tracking of file history and access to prior revisions.
RecentItems Shows a list of items recently accessed by the user, such as files and folders opened in Box.
SharedItems Retrieves items that have been shared, including their shared links and associated access permissions.
SignRequests Lists electronic signature requests sent or received through Box Sign, including request status.
UserEvents Provides a record of user activity events in Box, such as logins, file uploads, shares, and collaborations.

CData Python Connector for Box

Collections

Displays collections of items that users have grouped together in Box for easier navigation and organization.

Columns

Name Type Description
Id String Unique identifier assigned to the collection.
Name String The display name of the collection.
Type String Specifies the object type of the collection, such as collection.
CollectionType String Defines the subtype of the collection, which determines how it is visually presented in Box, such as favorites or recently accessed.

CData Python Connector for Box

FileMetadataInstances

Retrieves metadata applied to specific files, showing key-value fields associated with metadata templates.

Select

To select from the File Metadata Instances view, you must specify FileID, or FileID and Scope and Template in the WHERE clause. For example:

SELECT * FROM FileMetadataInstances WHERE FileId = '1723610396614';

Columns

Name Type Description
Id String A universally unique identifier (UUID) assigned to the metadata instance.
FileId [KEY] String Identifier of the file to which the metadata instance is attached.
Template String The name of the metadata template applied to the file.
Parent String Identifier of the parent item the metadata instance is attached to, formatted as {type}_{id} to combine item type and identifier.
Scope String Specifies the scope in which the metadata template is applied. This can be enterprise_{enterprise_id} for enterprise-specific templates or global for templates available across all enterprises.
Version String The version number of the metadata instance, starting at 0 and incrementing each time a user-defined property is updated.
CanEdit String Indicates whether the current user has permission to edit this metadata instance.
Type String The object type identifier for the metadata instance.
TypeVersion String The version of the metadata template definition that was last applied to this instance.
UserDefinedFieldName String The name of a user-defined field included in the metadata template.
UserDefinedFieldValue String The value assigned to a user-defined field in the metadata template.

CData Python Connector for Box

FileVersions

Lists all available versions of a file stored in Box, enabling tracking of file history and access to prior revisions.

Table Specific Information

File Versions contains information about older versions of a file. This table supports only the SELECT operation.

Select

When selecting from the File Versions view, you must specify FileId, or FileId and Id in the WHERE clause.

SELECT * FROM FileVersions WHERE FileId = '1926408231807';

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query file versions from multiple user accounts. For example:

SELECT * FROM FileVersions WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query file versions associated with their account.
  • File versions shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Columns

Name Type Description
Id [KEY] String The unique identifier of the file version, used to distinguish between different saved versions of the same file.
FileId String The unique identifier of the parent file that this version belongs to.
CreatedAt Datetime The timestamp when this version of the file was created. For example, '2023-01-15T10:45:00Z'.
ModifiedAt Datetime The timestamp when this version of the file was last modified.
ModifiedById String The Id of the user who last modified this file version.
ModifiedByName String The display name of the user who last modified this file version.
ModifiedByLogin String The login (usually email) of the user who last modified this file version.
ModifiedByType String The type of the user who last modified the file version, such as 'user' or 'service_account'.
Name String The name of the file associated with this version, including extension (for example, 'Report_Q1.pdf').
PurgedAt Datetime The timestamp when this file version was permanently deleted (purged).
RestoredAt Datetime The timestamp when this version of the file was restored.
RestoredById String The Id of the user who restored this file version.
RestoredByLogin String The login (usually email) of the user who restored this file version.
RestoredByName String The display name of the user who restored this file version.
RestoredByType String The type of the user who restored the file version, such as 'user' or 'service_account'.
Sha1 String The SHA-1 checksum of the file version, used to verify file integrity.
Size Int64 The size of the file version in bytes. For example, '204800' represents a 200 KB file.
TrashedAt Datetime The timestamp when this file version was moved to the trash.
TrashedById String The Id of the user who moved this file version to the trash.
TrashedByLogin String The login (usually email) of the user who moved this file version to the trash.
TrashedByName String The display name of the user who moved this file version to the trash.
TrashedByType String The type of the user who moved the file version to the trash, such as 'user' or 'service_account'.
Type String The item type, which is always 'file_version'.
AsUserId String The Id of the user you want to impersonate. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

RecentItems

Shows a list of items recently accessed by the user, such as files and folders opened in Box.

Columns

Name Type Description
Type String The type of recent item, such as file, folder, or web link.
InteractedAt Datetime The timestamp of the most recent interaction with the item.
InteractionSharedLink String The shared link used to access the item, if applicable; otherwise null.
InteractionType String The type of action most recently taken on the item, such as preview, edit, or download.
ItemId String The unique identifier for the recent item.

CData Python Connector for Box

SharedItems

Retrieves items that have been shared, including their shared links and associated access permissions.

Table Specific Information

Shared Items are Files that are open to public viewing by using a URL. These files can also be password protected. Anyone who has access to this URL and password can read/write to the file.

Select

To select from the Shared Items view, specify the SharedLink column that points to the item.

SELECT * FROM SharedItems WHERE SharedLink = 'https://app.box.co/s/abcdef123456';

If the SharedItem has a password, specify the password as well.

SELECT * FROM SharedItems WHERE SharedLink = 'www.url.com' AND SharedLinkPassword = 'password';

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query shared items from multiple user accounts. For example:

SELECT * FROM SharedItems WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query shared items associated with their account.
  • Shared items shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Columns

Name Type Description
Name String The name of the shared item.
ItemId [KEY] String The unique identifier of the shared item.
ItemType String The type of shared item, such as file, folder, or web link.
CreatedAt String The date and time when the shared item was created.
Description String The description of the shared item.
ModifiedAt String The date and time when the shared item was last modified.
OwnedById String The Id of the user who owns the shared item.
OwnedByName String The name of the user who owns the shared item.
OwnedByLogin String The login (email) of the user who owns the shared item.
ParentId String The Id of the parent folder or container of the shared item.
ParentName String The name of the parent folder or container of the shared item.
Access String Indicates the level of availability for the shared item, such as open or restricted.
DownloadCount Integer The number of times the shared item has been downloaded.
DownloadUrl String The direct URL to download the shared item.
IsPasswordEnabled String Indicates whether a password is required to access the shared item.
CanDownload Boolean Specifies whether the shared item can be downloaded.
CanPreview Boolean Specifies whether the shared item can be previewed.
PreviewCount Integer The number of times the shared item has been previewed.
Url String The preview URL for the shared item.
Size Long The size of the shared item in bytes.
AsUserId String The Id of the user you want to impersonate. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
SharedLink String The shared link used to access the item.
SharedLinkPassword String The password for the shared link, if required.

CData Python Connector for Box

SignRequests

Lists electronic signature requests sent or received through Box Sign, including request status.

Columns

Name Type Description
SignRequestAggregate String A JSON aggregate representing the details of a Box Sign request, including signer information, document references, and request metadata.
AsUserId String The Id of the user you want to impersonate. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

UserEvents

Provides a record of user activity events in Box, such as logins, file uploads, shares, and collaborations.

Table Specific Information

User events are logs that are saved after a change in a user's account.

Select

Query all the current user's events:

SELECT * FROM UserEvents;

If you're authenticated as an administrator with user impersonation permissions, you can query user events from multiple user accounts:

SELECT * FROM UserEvents WHERE AsUserId IN (SELECT Id FROM Users);

Note: User impersonation has the following limitations:

  • The authenticated user cannot be impersonated unless that user is a service account.
  • If the authenticated user is a standard user account, they can only query user events associated with their account.
  • User events shared with multiple users are only returned for one of the users.

Columns

Name Type Description
Id [KEY] String The unique identifier of the event.
SourceId String The identifier of the source object (such as a file, folder, or user) that triggered the event.
SourceType String The type of source object that triggered the event, such as file, folder, or user.
CreatedById String The Id of the user who initiated the event.
CreatedByName String The name of the user who initiated the event.
CreatedByLogin String The login (email) of the user who initiated the event.
CreatedAt Datetime The timestamp when the event occurred. This column is only available when streaming events with a StreamType of admin_logs.
RecordedAt Datetime The timestamp when the event was logged in the system.
SessionId String The identifier for the user session associated with the event.
EventType String The type or category of the event, such as file download, item deletion, or login.
ClassificationName String The security classification name or label associated with the event, if available.
AdditionalDetails String Supplementary metadata about the event, which may include details on how it was performed or external correlation data. Available only for Enterprise Events, and not all events include this object.
AsUserId String The Id of the user to impersonate when retrieving events. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Pseudo-Columns

Pseudo column fields are used in the WHERE clause of SELECT statements and offer more granular control over the data returned from the data source.

Name Type Description
StreamType String Specifies which type of event stream to use, such as admin_logs for enterprise-level events or user for individual user activity.

The allowed values are all, changes, sync, admin_logs, admin_logs_streaming.

CData Python Connector for Box

Stored Procedures

Stored procedures are function-like interfaces that extend the functionality of the connector beyond simple SELECT/INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE operations with Box.

Stored procedures accept a list of parameters, perform their intended function, and then return any relevant response data from Box, along with an indication of whether the procedure succeeded or failed.

CData Python Connector for Box Stored Procedures

Name Description
AddMetadataTemplatestoFile Applies a predefined metadata template to a file, creating a structured set of metadata fields for that file.
CopyFile Creates a copy of an existing file in Box within the same folder or a different destination folder.
CopyFolder Creates a duplicate of an entire folder, including its subfolders and files, in another location in Box.
CreateSchema Generates a schema file that defines the structure of a specified Box table or view for integration or analysis.
CreateSignRequest Creates a new electronic signature request for documents stored in Box using Box Sign.
DeleteExternalUsers Delete external users from current user enterprise. This will remove each external user from all invited collaborations within the current enterprise.
DeleteFile Permanently deletes a specified file from Box.
DownloadFile Downloads the contents of a file from Box to a local system or application.
EmptyTrash Permanently deletes all items currently in the trash for the authenticated user or enterprise.
GetOAuthAccessToken Retrieves an OAuth access token from Box to authenticate API requests.
GetOAuthAuthorizationURL Generates the authorization URL that a user must visit to grant application access during the OAuth authentication process.
LockFile Locks a file in Box to prevent other users from editing or uploading new versions while the lock is active.
RefreshOAuthAccessToken Refreshes an existing OAuth access token to maintain authentication without requiring user reauthorization.
RestoreItem Restores a previously deleted file or folder from the trash back to its original location.
Search Performs a global search across Box to find files, folders, and other items matching a search term.
ShareAnItem Creates or updates a shared link for a file, folder, or bookmark, enabling controlled external access.
UnlockFile Releases a file lock so that other users can edit or upload a new version.
UpdateFile Updates the content or metadata of an existing file in Box.
UploadFile Uploads a new file into a specified Box folder.
UploadFileVersion Uploads a new version of an existing file, maintaining version history in Box.

CData Python Connector for Box

AddMetadataTemplatestoFile

Applies a predefined metadata template to a file, creating a structured set of metadata fields for that file.

Input

Name Type Description
FileId String Unique identifier of the file to which the metadata template is applied.
TemplateKey String The key name of the metadata template that defines the fields to be applied.
Scope String The scope of the metadata template, such as enterprise or global.
TemplateValues String Optional field that specifies the values for the metadata template. Values must be separated by a semicolon(for example, 'DepartmentName=TestDepartment; DepartmentId=101'.)
AsUserId String Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success Bool Indicates whether the metadata template was successfully added to the file.

CData Python Connector for Box

CopyFile

Creates a copy of an existing file in Box within the same folder or a different destination folder.

Input

Name Type Description
FileID String Identifier of the file to be copied.
DestinationFolderId String Identifier of the destination folder where the file is copied.
FileVersionID String Identifier of a specific file version to copy. If not provided, the most recent version of the file is copied.
NewName String Optional new name to assign to the copied file. If omitted, the original name is retained.
AsUserId String Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the file copy operation completed successfully.
ID String Unique identifier assigned to the newly copied file.

CData Python Connector for Box

CopyFolder

Creates a duplicate of an entire folder, including its subfolders and files, in another location in Box.

Input

Name Type Description
FolderID String Identifier of the folder to be copied.
DestinationFolderId String Identifier of the destination folder where the folder is copied.
NewName String Optional new name to assign to the copied folder. If omitted, the original name is retained.
AsUserId String Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the folder copy operation completed successfully.
ID String Unique identifier assigned to the newly copied folder.

CData Python Connector for Box

CreateSchema

Generates a schema file that defines the structure of a specified Box table or view for integration or analysis.

CreateSchema

Creates a local schema file (.rsd) from an existing table or view in the data model.

The schema file is created in the directory set in the Location connection property when this procedure is executed. You can edit the file to include or exclude columns, rename columns, or adjust column datatypes.

The connector checks the Location to determine if the names of any .rsd files match a table or view in the data model. If there is a duplicate, the schema file will take precedence over the default instance of this table in the data model. If a schema file is present in Location that does not match an existing table or view, a new table or view entry is added to the data model of the connector.

Input

Name Type Description
TableName String The name of the Box table or view for which the schema definition will be generated.
FileName String The full file path and name where the generated schema will be saved (for example, 'C:\\Users\\User\\Desktop\\Box\\CustomTable.rsd').

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Result String Indicates whether the schema generation completed successfully or failed.
FileData String The generated schema file data encoded in Base64, returned when FileName and FileStream are not specified.

CData Python Connector for Box

CreateSignRequest

Creates a new electronic signature request for documents stored in Box using Box Sign.

Execute

To create a Sign Request you must provide a JSON object as the payload for the API request in the SignRequestPayload parameter. For the payload structure refer to the Box API Reference here.

EXEC CreateSignRequest SignRequestPayload = '{"are_reminders_enabled":true,"are_text_signatures_enabled":true,"days_valid":10,"declined_redirect_url":"https://cdata.com/","email_message":"Testing CreateSignRequest stored procedure",...}';

Alternatively, you can specify an absolute path to a file containing the JSON object.

EXEC CreateSignRequest SignRequestPayloadPath = 'C:/Users/User/payload.json';

Input

Name Type Description
SignRequestPayload String A JSON object that defines the details of the Sign Request to be created, including document information, recipients, and settings.
SignRequestPayloadPath String The absolute file path to a local JSON file containing the payload for creating a Sign Request.
AsUserId String Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
SignRequestAggregate String A JSON object representing the newly created Sign Request, including its unique identifier, status, and configuration details.

CData Python Connector for Box

DeleteExternalUsers

Delete external users from current user enterprise. This will remove each external user from all invited collaborations within the current enterprise.

Input

Name Type Description
ExternalUserId String Comma-separated list of external user IDs to delete, e.g. 'userId1,userId2'.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
ExternalUserId String The ID of the external user.
StatusCode String HTTP status code for a specific user's deletion request.
StatusMessage String Deletion request status details. This property is populated only when the deletion request is not successful.

CData Python Connector for Box

DeleteFile

Permanently deletes a specified file from Box.

Input

Name Type Description
FileID String Identifier of the file to be deleted. Only files owned by the authenticated user can be deleted.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the file deletion operation completed successfully.

CData Python Connector for Box

DownloadFile

Downloads the contents of a file from Box to a local system or application.

Input

Name Type Description
FileID String Identifier of the file to be downloaded.
FileVersionID String Identifier of a specific file version to download. If not provided, the most recent version is downloaded.
DownloadTo String The file path where the downloaded file should be saved locally.
AsUserId String Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.
UseSimpleName Boolean When set to true, removes unsupported special characters from the file name to ensure compatibility with operating systems that restrict certain characters. Characters removed include forward slash, backslash, colon, asterisk, question mark, double-quote, less than, greater than, and vertical bar.

The default value is false.

Name String The name to use when saving the file after download. If left blank, the original file name is used.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the file download operation completed successfully.
FileData String The downloaded file data encoded in Base64, returned when neither DownloadTo nor FileStream are specified.

CData Python Connector for Box

EmptyTrash

Permanently deletes all items currently in the trash for the authenticated user or enterprise.

Input

Name Type Description
AsUserId String Identifier of the user to impersonate for API requests, available only for Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the trash was successfully emptied.

CData Python Connector for Box

GetOAuthAccessToken

Retrieves an OAuth access token from Box to authenticate API requests.

Input

Name Type Description
AuthMode String Specifies the authentication flow to use. Choose 'App' to retrieve tokens via a desktop app flow, or 'Web' to retrieve tokens via a web application flow.

The allowed values are APP, WEB.

The default value is WEB.

CallbackUrl String The redirect URL where the user is sent after authorizing your application. This must exactly match the Redirect URL configured in your Box app settings. Required only when using AuthMode=Web.
Scope String A space- or comma-separated list of permissions (scopes) that define the level of access requested. Refer to the Box API documentation for available scopes.
Verifier String The authorization verifier returned by Box after the user grants access to your app. It is included as a parameter in the redirect CallbackUrl and is required to complete the token exchange.
State String An optional string used to maintain state between the request and callback. The same value sent is returned by Box, allowing use cases such as redirecting the user to a specific resource, mitigating CSRF, or including a nonce for security.
GrantType String Determines how to retrieve the access token.

The allowed values are CODE, CLIENT.

The default value is CODE.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
OAuthAccessToken String The short-lived access token returned from Box, used to authenticate API requests.
OAuthRefreshToken String The refresh token that can be used to obtain new access tokens when the current one expires. In Box, this value may be the same as the access token.
ExpiresIn String The lifetime of the access token in seconds. A value of -1 indicates the token does not expire.

CData Python Connector for Box

GetOAuthAuthorizationURL

Generates the authorization URL that a user must visit to grant application access during the OAuth authentication process.

Input

Name Type Description
CallbackUrl String The redirect URL where the user is sent after authorizing your application. This must exactly match the Redirect URL defined in your Box app settings.
Scope String A comma-separated list of scopes (permissions) your application is requesting from the user. Refer to the Box API for supported scope values.
Grant_Type String Specifies the authorization grant type for the OAuth flow.

The allowed values are code, token.

The default value is code.

State String An optional value that is passed through the OAuth flow and returned unchanged by Box. Often used to preserve application state, identify a session, mitigate CSRF attacks, or redirect the user to a specific resource after authorization.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
URL String The generated authorization URL. Direct the user to this URL in a browser so they can grant access to your app and obtain the authorization verifier token.

CData Python Connector for Box

LockFile

Locks a file in Box to prevent other users from editing or uploading new versions while the lock is active.

Input

Name Type Description
FileId String The unique identifier of the file to be locked.
ExpiresAt Datetime The timestamp when the lock expires. If not provided, the lock remains until it is manually removed.
PreventDownload Bool Indicates whether downloading the locked file should be prevented while the lock is active.

The default value is false.

AsUserId String The Id of the user to impersonate when performing the operation. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success Bool Indicates whether the file was successfully locked.

CData Python Connector for Box

RefreshOAuthAccessToken

Refreshes an existing OAuth access token to maintain authentication without requiring user reauthorization.

Input

Name Type Description
OAuthRefreshToken String The refresh token that was issued with the original access token. Used to request a new access token when the old one expires.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
OAuthAccessToken String The new access token returned from Box, used for authenticated API requests.
OAuthRefreshToken String The updated refresh token returned by Box, to be stored for the next token refresh request.
ExpiresIn String The number of seconds until the newly issued access token expires.

CData Python Connector for Box

RestoreItem

Restores a previously deleted file or folder from the trash back to its original location.

Input

Name Type Description
ItemId String The Id of the file or folder to be restored from the trash.
ItemType String The type of item to restore. Supported values are Files and Folders.
NewName String An optional new name to assign to the restored item if you do not want to use the original name.
NewParentId String An optional parent folder Id to place the restored item into. Used if the original parent folder no longer exists.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the file or folder was successfully restored.
ID String The unique identifier of the restored item.
ParentId String The identifier of the parent folder containing the restored item.

CData Python Connector for Box

Search

CData Python Connector for Box

ShareAnItem

Creates or updates a shared link for a file, folder, or bookmark, enabling controlled external access.

Input

Name Type Description
ItemId String The Id of the item to share.
ItemType String The type of item being shared.

The allowed values are file, folder, bookmark.

The default value is file.

Access String Specifies the access level of the shared link.

The allowed values are open, company, collaborators.

The default value is open.

Unshared_At String The expiration date when the shared link is automatically disabled.
Password String A password required to access the shared link, if enabled.
Can_Preview Boolean Indicates whether the item can be previewed through the shared link. Can only be set with open or company access.

The default value is true.

Can_Download Boolean Indicates whether the item can be downloaded through the shared link. Applicable only to files and folders, not bookmarks. Can only be set with open or company access.

The default value is true.

AsUserId String The Id of the user you want to impersonate. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Url String The URL of the newly created shared link.
Download_Url String The direct download URL for the shared item.
Download_Count String The number of times the item has been downloaded from the shared link.
Is_Password_Enabled String Indicates whether the shared link is protected by a password.
Unshared_At String The expiration date when the shared link was or will be disabled.
Preview_Count String The number of times the item has been previewed through the shared link.
Effective_Access String The effective access level applied to the shared link, as enforced by administrators.
Success String Whether or not the item was successfully shared.

CData Python Connector for Box

UnlockFile

Releases a file lock so that other users can edit or upload a new version.

Input

Name Type Description
FileId String The Id of the file you want to unlock.
AsUserId String The Id of the user you want to impersonate. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success Bool Indicates whether the file was successfully unlocked.

CData Python Connector for Box

UpdateFile

Updates the content or metadata of an existing file in Box.

Input

Name Type Description
FileID String The unique identifier of the file to be copied.
NewName String An optional new name for the copied file; if not provided, the original name is used.
Description String An optional description to assign to the copied file.
Parent String The identifier of the parent folder where the copied file should be placed. This can be used to move the file into a different folder.
CanDownload String Specifies who can download the copied file. Accepted values are 'open' (available to everyone) or 'company' (restricted to members of the user's enterprise).
Tags String A comma-separated list of tags to associate with the copied file. Each item supports up to 100 tags, with a maximum of 10,000 unique tags allowed per enterprise.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the file was successfully copied.
ID String The identifier of the newly copied file.

CData Python Connector for Box

UploadFile

Uploads a new file into a specified Box folder.

Input

Name Type Description
FilePath String The full local path of the file, including its name, to upload. This takes precedence over the Content input.
ParentId String The identifier of the parent folder where the file will be uploaded. If not provided, the file is uploaded to the root folder of the Box account.

The default value is 0.

AsUserId String The Id of the user to impersonate during the upload. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.
FileName String The name of the file to upload, including its extension. Required if Content is specified. If FilePath is also provided, this value overrides the file's original name.
CreatedAt Datetime An optional timestamp indicating when the file was originally created. Defaults to the upload time if not set. Format example: '2020-01-01T12:00:00-05:00'.
ModifiedAt Datetime An optional timestamp indicating when the file was last modified. Defaults to the upload time if not set. Format example: '2020-01-01T12:00:00-05:00'.
Hash String An optional SHA1 hash of the file to validate that the file was not corrupted during upload.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the file was uploaded successfully.
ID String The unique identifier of the uploaded file.
VersionID String The identifier for the specific version of the uploaded file.
Hash String The SHA1 hash of the uploaded file, used for integrity verification.
Etag String The entity tag of the uploaded file, used for versioning and concurrency control.

CData Python Connector for Box

UploadFileVersion

Uploads a new version of an existing file, maintaining version history in Box.

Input

Name Type Description
FilePath String The full local path of the file, including its name, for the new version upload.
FileId String The unique identifier of the file whose version is being updated.
NewName String An optional new name for the file. If provided, the file is renamed during the upload of the new version. The name must include the file extension (for example, SampleFile.txt).
AsUserId String The Id of the user to impersonate when uploading the new version. Only works with Admin, Co-Admin, and Service Accounts.
ModifiedAt Datetime An optional timestamp indicating when the file was last modified. If not set, the upload time is used. Example format: '2020-01-01T12:00:00-05:00'.
Hash String An optional SHA1 hash of the file used to verify the file's integrity during upload.
IfMatch String An optional concurrency control header. Provide the file's most recent etag to ensure it has not changed before updating. If the etag does not match, the request fails with a 412 Precondition Failed.

Result Set Columns

Name Type Description
Success String Indicates whether the new file version was uploaded successfully.
ID String The unique identifier of the updated file.
VersionID String The identifier for the specific version of the file that was uploaded.
Hash String The SHA1 hash of the uploaded file version, used for integrity verification.
Etag String The entity tag of the updated file, used for versioning and concurrency control.

CData Python Connector for Box

System Tables

You can query the system tables described in this section to access schema information, information on data source functionality, and batch operation statistics.

Schema Tables

The following tables return database metadata for Box:

Data Source Tables

The following tables return information about how to connect to and query the data source:

  • sys_connection_props: Returns information on the available connection properties.
  • sys_sqlinfo: Describes the SELECT queries that the connector can offload to the data source.

Query Information Tables

The following table returns query statistics for data modification queries

  • sys_identity: Returns information about batch operations or single updates.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_catalogs

Lists the available databases.

The following query retrieves all databases determined by the connection string:

SELECT * FROM sys_catalogs

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The database name.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_schemas

Lists the available schemas.

The following query retrieves all available schemas:

          SELECT * FROM sys_schemas
          

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The database name.
SchemaName String The schema name.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_tables

Lists the available tables.

The following query retrieves the available tables and views:

          SELECT * FROM sys_tables
          

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The database containing the table or view.
SchemaName String The schema containing the table or view.
TableName String The name of the table or view.
TableType String The table type (table or view).
Description String A description of the table or view.
IsUpdateable Boolean Whether the table can be updated.
IsInsertable Boolean Whether the table can be inserted into.
IsDeleteable Boolean Whether rows can be deleted from the table.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_tablecolumns

Describes the columns of the available tables and views.

The following query returns the columns and data types for the Files table:

SELECT ColumnName, DataTypeName FROM sys_tablecolumns WHERE TableName = 'Files' 

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The name of the database containing the table or view.
SchemaName String The schema containing the table or view.
TableName String The name of the table or view containing the column.
ColumnName String The column name.
DataTypeName String The data type name.
DataType Int32 An integer indicating the data type. This value is determined at run time based on the environment.
Length Int32 The storage size of the column.
DisplaySize Int32 The designated column's normal maximum width in characters.
NumericPrecision Int32 The maximum number of digits in numeric data. The column length in characters for character and date-time data.
NumericScale Int32 The column scale or number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
IsNullable Boolean Whether the column can contain null.
Description String A brief description of the column.
Ordinal Int32 The sequence number of the column.
IsAutoIncrement String Whether the column value is assigned in fixed increments.
IsGeneratedColumn String Whether the column is generated.
IsHidden Boolean Whether the column is hidden.
IsArray Boolean Whether the column is an array.
IsReadOnly Boolean Whether the column is read-only.
IsKey Boolean Indicates whether a field returned from sys_tablecolumns is the primary key of the table.
ColumnType String The role or classification of the column in the schema. Possible values include SYSTEM, LINKEDCOLUMN, NAVIGATIONKEY, REFERENCECOLUMN, and NAVIGATIONPARENTCOLUMN.
ColumnCapabilities Int32 A bit mask denoting the column's write capabilities. The value is the sum of the following: 1 if the column is required for INSERTs, 2 if the column is allowed for INSERTs, and 4 if the column is allowed for UPDATEs. A value of 0 indicates that the write capabilities of the column are unknown or that the column is read-only.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_procedures

Lists the available stored procedures.

The following query retrieves the available stored procedures:

          SELECT * FROM sys_procedures
          

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The database containing the stored procedure.
SchemaName String The schema containing the stored procedure.
ProcedureName String The name of the stored procedure.
Description String A description of the stored procedure.
ProcedureType String The type of the procedure, such as PROCEDURE or FUNCTION.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_procedureparameters

Describes stored procedure parameters.

The following query returns information about all of the input parameters for the UploadFile stored procedure:

SELECT * FROM sys_procedureparameters WHERE ProcedureName = 'UploadFile' AND Direction = 1 OR Direction = 2

To include result set columns in addition to the parameters, set the IncludeResultColumns pseudo column to True:

SELECT * FROM sys_procedureparameters WHERE ProcedureName = 'UploadFile' AND IncludeResultColumns='True'

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The name of the database containing the stored procedure.
SchemaName String The name of the schema containing the stored procedure.
ProcedureName String The name of the stored procedure containing the parameter.
ColumnName String The name of the stored procedure parameter.
Direction Int32 An integer corresponding to the type of the parameter: input (1), input/output (2), or output(4). input/output type parameters can be both input and output parameters.
DataType Int32 An integer indicating the data type. This value is determined at run time based on the environment.
DataTypeName String The name of the data type.
NumericPrecision Int32 The maximum precision for numeric data. The column length in characters for character and date-time data.
Length Int32 The number of characters allowed for character data. The number of digits allowed for numeric data.
NumericScale Int32 The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in numeric data.
IsNullable Boolean Whether the parameter can contain null.
IsRequired Boolean Whether the parameter is required for execution of the procedure.
IsArray Boolean Whether the parameter is an array.
Description String The description of the parameter.
Ordinal Int32 The index of the parameter.
Values String The values you can set in this parameter are limited to those shown in this column. Possible values are comma-separated.
SupportsStreams Boolean Whether the parameter represents a file that you can pass as either a file path or a stream.
IsPath Boolean Whether the parameter is a target path for a schema creation operation.
Default String The value used for this parameter when no value is specified.
SpecificName String A label that, when multiple stored procedures have the same name, uniquely identifies each identically-named stored procedure. If there's only one procedure with a given name, its name is simply reflected here.
IsCDataProvided Boolean Whether the procedure is added/implemented by CData, as opposed to being a native Box procedure.

Pseudo-Columns

Name Type Description
IncludeResultColumns Boolean Whether the output should include columns from the result set in addition to parameters. Defaults to False.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_keycolumns

Describes the primary and foreign keys.

The following query retrieves the primary key for the Files table:

         SELECT * FROM sys_keycolumns WHERE IsKey='True' AND TableName='Files' 
          

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The name of the database containing the key.
SchemaName String The name of the schema containing the key.
TableName String The name of the table containing the key.
ColumnName String The name of the key column.
IsKey Boolean Whether the column is a primary key in the table referenced in the TableName field.
IsForeignKey Boolean Whether the column is a foreign key referenced in the TableName field.
PrimaryKeyName String The name of the primary key.
ForeignKeyName String The name of the foreign key.
ReferencedCatalogName String The database containing the primary key.
ReferencedSchemaName String The schema containing the primary key.
ReferencedTableName String The table containing the primary key.
ReferencedColumnName String The column name of the primary key.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_foreignkeys

Describes the foreign keys.

The following query retrieves all foreign keys which refer to other tables:

         SELECT * FROM sys_foreignkeys WHERE ForeignKeyType = 'FOREIGNKEY_TYPE_IMPORT'
          

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The name of the database containing the key.
SchemaName String The name of the schema containing the key.
TableName String The name of the table containing the key.
ColumnName String The name of the key column.
PrimaryKeyName String The name of the primary key.
ForeignKeyName String The name of the foreign key.
ReferencedCatalogName String The database containing the primary key.
ReferencedSchemaName String The schema containing the primary key.
ReferencedTableName String The table containing the primary key.
ReferencedColumnName String The column name of the primary key.
ForeignKeyType String Designates whether the foreign key is an import (points to other tables) or export (referenced from other tables) key.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_primarykeys

Describes the primary keys.

The following query retrieves the primary keys from all tables and views:

         SELECT * FROM sys_primarykeys
          

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The name of the database containing the key.
SchemaName String The name of the schema containing the key.
TableName String The name of the table containing the key.
ColumnName String The name of the key column.
KeySeq String The sequence number of the primary key.
KeyName String The name of the primary key.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_indexes

Describes the available indexes. By filtering on indexes, you can write more selective queries with faster query response times.

The following query retrieves all indexes that are not primary keys:

          SELECT * FROM sys_indexes WHERE IsPrimary='false'
          

Columns

Name Type Description
CatalogName String The name of the database containing the index.
SchemaName String The name of the schema containing the index.
TableName String The name of the table containing the index.
IndexName String The index name.
ColumnName String The name of the column associated with the index.
IsUnique Boolean True if the index is unique. False otherwise.
IsPrimary Boolean True if the index is a primary key. False otherwise.
Type Int16 An integer value corresponding to the index type: statistic (0), clustered (1), hashed (2), or other (3).
SortOrder String The sort order: A for ascending or D for descending.
OrdinalPosition Int16 The sequence number of the column in the index.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_connection_props

Returns information on the available connection properties and those set in the connection string.

The following query retrieves all connection properties that have been set in the connection string or set through a default value:

SELECT * FROM sys_connection_props WHERE Value <> ''

Columns

Name Type Description
Name String The name of the connection property.
ShortDescription String A brief description.
Type String The data type of the connection property.
Default String The default value if one is not explicitly set.
Values String A comma-separated list of possible values. A validation error is thrown if another value is specified.
Value String The value you set or a preconfigured default.
Required Boolean Whether the property is required to connect.
Category String The category of the connection property.
IsSessionProperty String Whether the property is a session property, used to save information about the current connection.
Sensitivity String The sensitivity level of the property. This informs whether the property is obfuscated in logging and authentication forms.
PropertyName String A camel-cased truncated form of the connection property name.
Ordinal Int32 The index of the parameter.
CatOrdinal Int32 The index of the parameter category.
Hierarchy String Shows dependent properties associated that need to be set alongside this one.
Visible Boolean Informs whether the property is visible in the connection UI.
ETC String Various miscellaneous information about the property.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_sqlinfo

Describes the SELECT query processing that the connector can offload to the data source.

See SQL Compliance for SQL syntax details.

Discovering the Data Source's SELECT Capabilities

Below is an example data set of SQL capabilities. Some aspects of SELECT functionality are returned in a comma-separated list if supported; otherwise, the column contains NO.

NameDescriptionPossible Values
AGGREGATE_FUNCTIONSSupported aggregation functions.AVG, COUNT, MAX, MIN, SUM, DISTINCT
COUNTWhether COUNT function is supported.YES, NO
IDENTIFIER_QUOTE_OPEN_CHARThe opening character used to escape an identifier.[
IDENTIFIER_QUOTE_CLOSE_CHARThe closing character used to escape an identifier.]
SUPPORTED_OPERATORSA list of supported SQL operators.=, >, <, >=, <=, <>, !=, LIKE, NOT LIKE, IN, NOT IN, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL, AND, OR
GROUP_BYWhether GROUP BY is supported, and, if so, the degree of support.NO, NO_RELATION, EQUALS_SELECT, SQL_GB_COLLATE
OJ_CAPABILITIESThe supported varieties of outer joins supported.NO, LEFT, RIGHT, FULL, INNER, NOT_ORDERED, ALL_COMPARISON_OPS
OUTER_JOINSWhether outer joins are supported.YES, NO
SUBQUERIESWhether subqueries are supported, and, if so, the degree of support.NO, COMPARISON, EXISTS, IN, CORRELATED_SUBQUERIES, QUANTIFIED
STRING_FUNCTIONSSupported string functions.LENGTH, CHAR, LOCATE, REPLACE, SUBSTRING, RTRIM, LTRIM, RIGHT, LEFT, UCASE, SPACE, SOUNDEX, LCASE, CONCAT, ASCII, REPEAT, OCTET, BIT, POSITION, INSERT, TRIM, UPPER, REGEXP, LOWER, DIFFERENCE, CHARACTER, SUBSTR, STR, REVERSE, PLAN, UUIDTOSTR, TRANSLATE, TRAILING, TO, STUFF, STRTOUUID, STRING, SPLIT, SORTKEY, SIMILAR, REPLICATE, PATINDEX, LPAD, LEN, LEADING, KEY, INSTR, INSERTSTR, HTML, GRAPHICAL, CONVERT, COLLATION, CHARINDEX, BYTE
NUMERIC_FUNCTIONSSupported numeric functions.ABS, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, CEILING, COS, COT, EXP, FLOOR, LOG, MOD, SIGN, SIN, SQRT, TAN, PI, RAND, DEGREES, LOG10, POWER, RADIANS, ROUND, TRUNCATE
TIMEDATE_FUNCTIONSSupported date/time functions.NOW, CURDATE, DAYOFMONTH, DAYOFWEEK, DAYOFYEAR, MONTH, QUARTER, WEEK, YEAR, CURTIME, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND, TIMESTAMPADD, TIMESTAMPDIFF, DAYNAME, MONTHNAME, CURRENT_DATE, CURRENT_TIME, CURRENT_TIMESTAMP, EXTRACT
REPLICATION_SKIP_TABLESIndicates tables skipped during replication.
REPLICATION_TIMECHECK_COLUMNSA string array containing a list of columns which will be used to check for (in the given order) to use as a modified column during replication.
IDENTIFIER_PATTERNString value indicating what string is valid for an identifier.
SUPPORT_TRANSACTIONIndicates if the provider supports transactions such as commit and rollback.YES, NO
DIALECTIndicates the SQL dialect to use.
KEY_PROPERTIESIndicates the properties which identify the uniform database.
SUPPORTS_MULTIPLE_SCHEMASIndicates if multiple schemas may exist for the provider.YES, NO
SUPPORTS_MULTIPLE_CATALOGSIndicates if multiple catalogs may exist for the provider.YES, NO
DATASYNCVERSIONThe CData Data Sync version needed to access this driver.Standard, Starter, Professional, Enterprise
DATASYNCCATEGORYThe CData Data Sync category of this driver.Source, Destination, Cloud Destination
SUPPORTSENHANCEDSQLWhether enhanced SQL functionality beyond what is offered by the API is supported.TRUE, FALSE
SUPPORTS_BATCH_OPERATIONSWhether batch operations are supported.YES, NO
SQL_CAPAll supported SQL capabilities for this driver.SELECT, INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE, TRANSACTIONS, ORDERBY, OAUTH, ASSIGNEDID, LIMIT, LIKE, BULKINSERT, COUNT, BULKDELETE, BULKUPDATE, GROUPBY, HAVING, AGGS, OFFSET, REPLICATE, COUNTDISTINCT, JOINS, DROP, CREATE, DISTINCT, INNERJOINS, SUBQUERIES, ALTER, MULTIPLESCHEMAS, GROUPBYNORELATION, OUTERJOINS, UNIONALL, UNION, UPSERT, GETDELETED, CROSSJOINS, GROUPBYCOLLATE, MULTIPLECATS, FULLOUTERJOIN, MERGE, JSONEXTRACT, BULKUPSERT, SUM, SUBQUERIESFULL, MIN, MAX, JOINSFULL, XMLEXTRACT, AVG, MULTISTATEMENTS, FOREIGNKEYS, CASE, LEFTJOINS, COMMAJOINS, WITH, LITERALS, RENAME, NESTEDTABLES, EXECUTE, BATCH, BASIC, INDEX
PREFERRED_CACHE_OPTIONSA string value specifies the preferred cacheOptions.
ENABLE_EF_ADVANCED_QUERYIndicates if the driver directly supports advanced queries coming from Entity Framework. If not, queries will be handled client side.YES, NO
PSEUDO_COLUMNSA string array indicating the available pseudo columns.
MERGE_ALWAYSIf the value is true, The Merge Mode is forcibly executed in Data Sync.TRUE, FALSE
REPLICATION_MIN_DATE_QUERYA select query to return the replicate start datetime.
REPLICATION_MIN_FUNCTIONAllows a provider to specify the formula name to use for executing a server side min.
REPLICATION_START_DATEAllows a provider to specify a replicate startdate.
REPLICATION_MAX_DATE_QUERYA select query to return the replicate end datetime.
REPLICATION_MAX_FUNCTIONAllows a provider to specify the formula name to use for executing a server side max.
IGNORE_INTERVALS_ON_INITIAL_REPLICATEA list of tables which will skip dividing the replicate into chunks on the initial replicate.
CHECKCACHE_USE_PARENTIDIndicates whether the CheckCache statement should be done against the parent key column.TRUE, FALSE
CREATE_SCHEMA_PROCEDURESIndicates stored procedures that can be used for generating schema files.

The following query retrieves the operators that can be used in the WHERE clause:

SELECT * FROM sys_sqlinfo WHERE Name = 'SUPPORTED_OPERATORS'
Note that individual tables may have different limitations or requirements on the WHERE clause; refer to the Data Model section for more information.

Columns

Name Type Description
NAME String A component of SQL syntax, or a capability that can be processed on the server.
VALUE String Detail on the supported SQL or SQL syntax.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_identity

Returns information about attempted modifications.

The following query retrieves the Ids of the modified rows in a batch operation:

         SELECT * FROM sys_identity
          

Columns

Name Type Description
Id String The database-generated Id returned from a data modification operation.
Batch String An identifier for the batch. 1 for a single operation.
Operation String The result of the operation in the batch: INSERTED, UPDATED, or DELETED.
Message String SUCCESS or an error message if the update in the batch failed.

CData Python Connector for Box

sys_information

Describes the available system information.

The following query retrieves all columns:

SELECT * FROM sys_information

Columns

NameTypeDescription
ProductStringThe name of the product.
VersionStringThe version number of the product.
DatasourceStringThe name of the datasource the product connects to.
NodeIdStringThe unique identifier of the machine where the product is installed.
HelpURLStringThe URL to the product's help documentation.
LicenseStringThe license information for the product. (If this information is not available, the field may be left blank or marked as 'N/A'.)
LocationStringThe file path location where the product's library is stored.
EnvironmentStringThe version of the environment or rumtine the product is currently running under.
DataSyncVersionStringThe tier of CData Sync required to use this connector.
DataSyncCategoryStringThe category of CData Sync functionality (e.g., Source, Destination).

CData Python Connector for Box

Connection String Options

The connection string properties are the various options that can be used to establish a connection. This section provides a complete list of the options you can configure in the connection string for this provider. Click the links for further details.

For more information on establishing a connection, see Establishing a Connection.

Authentication


PropertyDescription
AuthSchemeSpecifies the type of authentication to use when connecting to Box.
ImpersonateUserModeSpecify the type of the user impersonation. It should be whether the User mode or the Admin mode.

JWT OAuth


PropertyDescription
OAuthJWTCertSupplies the name of the client certificate's JWT Certificate store.
OAuthJWTCertTypeIdentifies the type of key store containing the JWT Certificate.
OAuthJWTCertPasswordProvides the password for the OAuth JWT certificate used to access a password-protected certificate store. If the certificate store does not require a password, leave this property blank.
OAuthJWTCertSubjectIdentifies the subject of the OAuth JWT certificate used to locate a matching certificate in the store. Supports partial matches and the wildcard '*' to select the first certificate.
OAuthJWTIssuerThe issuer of the Java Web Token.
OAuthJWTSubjectThe user subject for which the application is requesting delegated access.
OAuthJWTSubjectTypeThe SubType for the JWT authentication.
OAuthJWTPublicKeyIdThe Id of the public key for JWT.

OAuth


PropertyDescription
InitiateOAuthSpecifies the process for obtaining or refreshing the OAuth access token, which maintains user access while an authenticated, authorized user is working.
OAuthClientIdSpecifies the client ID (also known as the consumer key) assigned to your custom OAuth application. This ID is required to identify the application to the OAuth authorization server during authentication.
OAuthClientSecretSpecifies the client secret assigned to your custom OAuth application. This confidential value is used to authenticate the application to the OAuth authorization server. (Custom OAuth applications only.).
OAuthAccessTokenSpecifies the OAuth access token used to authenticate requests to the data source. This token is issued by the authorization server after a successful OAuth exchange.
SubjectIdThe user subject for which the application is requesting delegated access.
SubjectTypeThe Subject Type for the Client Credentials authentication.
OAuthSettingsLocationSpecifies the location of the settings file where OAuth values are saved.
CallbackURLIdentifies the URL users return to after authenticating to Box via OAuth (Custom OAuth applications only).
OAuthVerifierSpecifies a verifier code returned from the OAuthAuthorizationURL . Used when authenticating to OAuth on a headless server, where a browser can't be launched. Requires both OAuthSettingsLocation and OAuthVerifier to be set.
OAuthRefreshTokenSpecifies the OAuth refresh token used to request a new access token after the original has expired.
OAuthExpiresInSpecifies the duration in seconds, of an OAuth Access Token's lifetime. The token can be reissued to keep access alive as long as the user keeps working.
OAuthTokenTimestampDisplays a Unix epoch timestamp in milliseconds that shows how long ago the current access token was created.

SSL


PropertyDescription
SSLServerCertSpecifies the certificate to be accepted from the server when connecting using TLS/SSL.

Firewall


PropertyDescription
FirewallTypeSpecifies the protocol the provider uses to tunnel traffic through a proxy-based firewall.
FirewallServerIdentifies the IP address, DNS name, or host name of a proxy used to traverse a firewall and relay user queries to network resources.
FirewallPortSpecifies the TCP port to be used for a proxy-based firewall.
FirewallUserIdentifies the user ID of the account authenticating to a proxy-based firewall.
FirewallPasswordSpecifies the password of the user account authenticating to a proxy-based firewall.

Proxy


PropertyDescription
ProxyAutoDetectSpecifies whether the provider checks your system proxy settings for existing proxy server configurations, rather than using a manually specified proxy server.
ProxyServerIdentifies the hostname or IP address of the proxy server through which you want to route HTTP traffic.
ProxyPortIdentifies the TCP port on your specified proxy server that has been reserved for routing HTTP traffic to and from the client.
ProxyAuthSchemeSpecifies the authentication method the provider uses when authenticating to the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.
ProxyUserProvides the username of a user account registered with the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.
ProxyPasswordSpecifies the password of the user specified in the ProxyUser connection property.
ProxySSLTypeSpecifies the SSL type to use when connecting to the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.
ProxyExceptionsSpecifies a semicolon-separated list of destination hostnames or IPs that are exempt from connecting through the proxy server set in the ProxyServer connection property.

Logging


PropertyDescription
LogfileSpecifies the file path to the log file where the provider records its activities, such as authentication, query execution, and connection details.
VerbositySpecifies the verbosity level of the log file, which controls the amount of detail logged. Supported values range from 1 to 5.
LogModulesSpecifies the core modules to include in the log file. Use a semicolon-separated list of module names. By default, all modules are logged.
MaxLogFileSizeSpecifies the maximum size of a single log file in bytes. For example, '10 MB'. When the file reaches the limit, the provider creates a new log file with the date and time appended to the name.
MaxLogFileCountSpecifies the maximum number of log files the provider retains. When the limit is reached, the oldest log file is deleted to make space for a new one.

Schema


PropertyDescription
LocationSpecifies the location of a directory containing schema files that define tables, views, and stored procedures. Depending on your service's requirements, this may be expressed as either an absolute path or a relative path.
BrowsableSchemasOptional setting that restricts the schemas reported to a subset of all available schemas. For example, BrowsableSchemas=SchemaA,SchemaB,SchemaC .
TablesOptional setting that restricts the tables reported to a subset of all available tables. For example, Tables=TableA,TableB,TableC .
ViewsOptional setting that restricts the views reported to a subset of the available tables. For example, Views=ViewA,ViewB,ViewC .

Caching


PropertyDescription
AutoCacheSpecifies whether the content of tables targeted by SELECT queries is automatically cached to the specified cache database.
CacheProviderThe namespace of an ADO.NET provider. The specified provider is used as the target database for all caching operations.
CacheDriverThe driver class of a JDBC driver. The specified driver is used to connect to the target database for all caching operations.
CacheConnectionSpecifies the connection string for the specified cache database.
CacheLocationSpecifies the path to the cache when caching to a file.
CacheToleranceNotes the tolerance, in seconds, for stale data in the specified cache database. Requires AutoCache to be set to True.
OfflineGets the data from the specified cache database instead of live Box data.
CacheMetadataDetermines whether the provider caches table metadata to a file-based cache database.

Miscellaneous


PropertyDescription
AsUserIdSpecifies the Box user ID to impersonate when making API calls. Only supported for Admin, Co-Admin, or Service Accounts.
DirectoryRetrievalDepthSpecifies the maximum folder depth the provider retrieves when querying the Folders and Files tables.
ExposeCollectionViewsDetermines whether to expose every collection in your Box account as separate views.
IncludeCustomFieldsSpecifies whether the provider includes Box metadata templates as custom columns in the Files table.
MaxRowsSpecifies the maximum number of rows returned for queries that do not include either aggregation or GROUP BY.
OtherSpecifies advanced connection properties for specialized scenarios. Use this property only under the guidance of our Support team to address specific issues.
PseudoColumnsSpecifies the pseudocolumns to expose as table columns, expressed as a string in the format 'TableName=ColumnName;TableName=ColumnName'.
ReadonlyToggles read-only access to Box from the provider.
RTKSpecifies the runtime key for licensing the provider. If unset or invalid, the provider defaults to the standard licensing method. This property is only required in environments where the standard licensing method is unsupported or requires a runtime key.
TimeoutSpecifies the maximum time, in seconds, that the provider waits for a server response before throwing a timeout error.
UserDefinedViewsSpecifies a filepath to a JSON configuration file that defines custom views. The provider automatically detects and uses the views specified in this file.
CData Python Connector for Box

Authentication

This section provides a complete list of the Authentication properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
AuthSchemeSpecifies the type of authentication to use when connecting to Box.
ImpersonateUserModeSpecify the type of the user impersonation. It should be whether the User mode or the Admin mode.
CData Python Connector for Box

AuthScheme

Specifies the type of authentication to use when connecting to Box.

Possible Values

OAuth, OAuthJWT, OAuthClient

Data Type

string

Default Value

"OAuth"

Remarks

  • OAuth: Uses OAuth authentication using a standard user account.
  • OAuthJWT: Uses OAuth authentication using an OAuth service account.
  • OAuthClient: Uses Client Credentials authentication.

CData Python Connector for Box

ImpersonateUserMode

Specify the type of the user impersonation. It should be whether the User mode or the Admin mode.

Possible Values

User, Admin

Data Type

string

Default Value

"User"

Remarks

Specify the type of the user impersonation. It should be whether the User mode or the Admin mode. The Admin mode is available only for Enterprise with Governance accounts and will be upon request. It will not work for any other accounts.

CData Python Connector for Box

JWT OAuth

This section provides a complete list of the JWT OAuth properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
OAuthJWTCertSupplies the name of the client certificate's JWT Certificate store.
OAuthJWTCertTypeIdentifies the type of key store containing the JWT Certificate.
OAuthJWTCertPasswordProvides the password for the OAuth JWT certificate used to access a password-protected certificate store. If the certificate store does not require a password, leave this property blank.
OAuthJWTCertSubjectIdentifies the subject of the OAuth JWT certificate used to locate a matching certificate in the store. Supports partial matches and the wildcard '*' to select the first certificate.
OAuthJWTIssuerThe issuer of the Java Web Token.
OAuthJWTSubjectThe user subject for which the application is requesting delegated access.
OAuthJWTSubjectTypeThe SubType for the JWT authentication.
OAuthJWTPublicKeyIdThe Id of the public key for JWT.
CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTCert

Supplies the name of the client certificate's JWT Certificate store.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The OAuthJWTCertType field specifies the type of the certificate store specified in OAuthJWTCert. If the store is password-protected, use OAuthJWTCertPassword to supply the password..

OAuthJWTCert is used in conjunction with the OAuthJWTCertSubject field in order to specify client certificates. If OAuthJWTCert has a value, and OAuthJWTCertSubject is set, the CData Python Connector for Box initiates a search for a certificate. For further information, see OAuthJWTCertSubject.

Designations of certificate stores are platform-dependent.

Notes

  • The most common User and Machine certificate stores in Windows include:
    • MY: A certificate store holding personal certificates with their associated private keys.
    • CA: Certifying authority certificates.
    • ROOT: Root certificates.
    • SPC: Software publisher certificates.
  • In Java, the certificate store normally is a file containing certificates and optional private keys.
  • When the certificate store type is PFXFile, this property must be set to the name of the file.
  • When the type is PFXBlob, the property must be set to the binary contents of a PFX file (i.e. PKCS12 certificate store).

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTCertType

Identifies the type of key store containing the JWT Certificate.

Possible Values

USER, MACHINE, PFXFILE, PFXBLOB, JKSFILE, JKSBLOB, PEMKEY_FILE, PEMKEY_BLOB, PUBLIC_KEY_FILE, PUBLIC_KEY_BLOB, SSHPUBLIC_KEY_FILE, SSHPUBLIC_KEY_BLOB, P7BFILE, PPKFILE, XMLFILE, XMLBLOB, BCFKSFILE, BCFKSBLOB, BOXJSON, BOXJSONBLOB

Data Type

string

Default Value

"USER"

Remarks

ValueDescriptionNotes
USERA certificate store owned by the current user. Only available in Windows.
MACHINEA machine store.Not available in Java or other non-Windows environments.
PFXFILEA PFX (PKCS12) file containing certificates.
PFXBLOBA string (base-64-encoded) representing a certificate store in PFX (PKCS12) format.
JKSFILEA Java key store (JKS) file containing certificates.Only available in Java.
JKSBLOBA string (base-64-encoded) representing a certificate store in Java key store (JKS) format. Only available in Java.
PEMKEY_FILEA PEM-encoded file that contains a private key and an optional certificate.
PEMKEY_BLOBA string (base64-encoded) that contains a private key and an optional certificate.
PUBLIC_KEY_FILEA file that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate.
PUBLIC_KEY_BLOBA string (base-64-encoded) that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate.
SSHPUBLIC_KEY_FILEA file that contains an SSH-style public key.
SSHPUBLIC_KEY_BLOBA string (base-64-encoded) that contains an SSH-style public key.
P7BFILEA PKCS7 file containing certificates.
PPKFILEA file that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key).
XMLFILEA file that contains a certificate in XML format.
XMLBLOBAstring that contains a certificate in XML format.
BCFKSFILEA file that contains an Bouncy Castle keystore.
BCFKSBLOBA string (base-64-encoded) that contains a Bouncy Castle keystore.
BOXJSONA JSON file containing the service account credentials. Only valid when connecting to Box.
BOXJSONBLOBThe certificate store is a string that contains the service account JSON. Only valid when connecting to Box.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTCertPassword

Provides the password for the OAuth JWT certificate used to access a password-protected certificate store. If the certificate store does not require a password, leave this property blank.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property specifies the password needed to open a password-protected certificate store. To determine if a password is necessary, refer to the documentation or configuration for your specific certificate store.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTCertSubject

Identifies the subject of the OAuth JWT certificate used to locate a matching certificate in the store. Supports partial matches and the wildcard '*' to select the first certificate.

Data Type

string

Default Value

"*"

Remarks

The value of this property is used to locate a matching certificate in the store. The search process works as follows:

  • If an exact match for the subject is found, the corresponding certificate is selected.
  • If no exact match is found, the store is searched for certificates whose subjects contain the property value.
  • If no match is found, no certificate is selected.

You can set the value to '*' to automatically select the first certificate in the store. The certificate subject is a comma-separated list of distinguished name fields and values. For example: CN=www.server.com, OU=test, C=US, E=support@cdata.com.

Common fields include:

FieldMeaning
CNCommon Name. This is commonly a host name like www.server.com.
OOrganization
OUOrganizational Unit
LLocality
SState
CCountry
EEmail Address

If a field value contains a comma, enclose it in quotes. For example: "O=ACME, Inc.".

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTIssuer

The issuer of the Java Web Token.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The issuer of the Java Web Token. This is typically either the Client Id or Email Address of the OAuth Application.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTSubject

The user subject for which the application is requesting delegated access.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The user subject for which the application is requesting delegated access. Typically, the user account name or email address.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTSubjectType

The SubType for the JWT authentication.

Possible Values

enterprise, user

Data Type

string

Default Value

"enterprise"

Remarks

The SubType for the JWT authentication. Set this to "enterprise" or "user" depending on the type of token being requested.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthJWTPublicKeyId

The Id of the public key for JWT.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The Id of the public key for JWT. Set this to the value of your Public Key Id in your app settings.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuth

This section provides a complete list of the OAuth properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
InitiateOAuthSpecifies the process for obtaining or refreshing the OAuth access token, which maintains user access while an authenticated, authorized user is working.
OAuthClientIdSpecifies the client ID (also known as the consumer key) assigned to your custom OAuth application. This ID is required to identify the application to the OAuth authorization server during authentication.
OAuthClientSecretSpecifies the client secret assigned to your custom OAuth application. This confidential value is used to authenticate the application to the OAuth authorization server. (Custom OAuth applications only.).
OAuthAccessTokenSpecifies the OAuth access token used to authenticate requests to the data source. This token is issued by the authorization server after a successful OAuth exchange.
SubjectIdThe user subject for which the application is requesting delegated access.
SubjectTypeThe Subject Type for the Client Credentials authentication.
OAuthSettingsLocationSpecifies the location of the settings file where OAuth values are saved.
CallbackURLIdentifies the URL users return to after authenticating to Box via OAuth (Custom OAuth applications only).
OAuthVerifierSpecifies a verifier code returned from the OAuthAuthorizationURL . Used when authenticating to OAuth on a headless server, where a browser can't be launched. Requires both OAuthSettingsLocation and OAuthVerifier to be set.
OAuthRefreshTokenSpecifies the OAuth refresh token used to request a new access token after the original has expired.
OAuthExpiresInSpecifies the duration in seconds, of an OAuth Access Token's lifetime. The token can be reissued to keep access alive as long as the user keeps working.
OAuthTokenTimestampDisplays a Unix epoch timestamp in milliseconds that shows how long ago the current access token was created.
CData Python Connector for Box

InitiateOAuth

Specifies the process for obtaining or refreshing the OAuth access token, which maintains user access while an authenticated, authorized user is working.

Possible Values

OFF, REFRESH, GETANDREFRESH

Data Type

string

Default Value

"OFF"

Remarks

OAuth is an authorization framework that enables applications to obtain limited access to user accounts on an HTTP service. The OAuth flow defines the method to be used for:

  • Logging in users.
  • Exchanging user credentials for an OAuth access token to be used for authentication.
  • Providing limited access to applications.

The options for initiating and maintaining OAuth access are named for the parts of that flow that the connector handles:

OFF The connector provides no automatic OAuth flow initiation. The OAuth flow is handled entirely by the user.
This means that the user must refresh the token manually, and reconnect with an updated OAuthAccessToken property when the current token expires.
GETANDREFRESH The connector handles the entire OAuth flow (both GET and REFRESH). This means that if a token already exists, the connector refreshes it when necessary; if no token currently exists, the connector obtains it by prompting the user to login.
REFRESH The user obtains the OAuth Access Token and sets up the sequence for refreshing the OAuth Access Token. (The user is never prompted to log in to authenticate.) After the user logs in, the connector handles the refresh of the OAuth Access Token.

For more information on how to set up OAuth and use this property when configuring a connection, see Establishing a Connection.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthClientId

Specifies the client ID (also known as the consumer key) assigned to your custom OAuth application. This ID is required to identify the application to the OAuth authorization server during authentication.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property is required in two cases:

  • When using a custom OAuth application, such as in web-based authentication flows, service-based authentication, or certificate-based flows that require application registration.
  • If the driver does not provide embedded OAuth credentials.

(When the driver provides embedded OAuth credentials, this value may already be provided by the connector and thus not require manual entry.)

OAuthClientId is generally used alongside other OAuth-related properties such as OAuthClientSecret and OAuthSettingsLocation when configuring an authenticated connection.

OAuthClientId is one of the key connection parameters that need to be set before users can authenticate via OAuth. You can usually find this value in your identity provider’s application registration settings. Look for a field labeled Client ID, Application ID, or Consumer Key.

While the client ID is not considered a confidential value like a client secret, it is still part of your application's identity and should be handled carefully. Avoid exposing it in public repositories or shared configuration files.

For more information on how this property is used when configuring a connection, see Establishing a Connection.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthClientSecret

Specifies the client secret assigned to your custom OAuth application. This confidential value is used to authenticate the application to the OAuth authorization server. (Custom OAuth applications only.).

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property (sometimes called the application secret or consumer secret) is required when using a custom OAuth application in any flow that requires secure client authentication, such as web-based OAuth, service-based connections, or certificate-based authorization flows. It is not required when using an embedded OAuth application.

The client secret is used during the token exchange step of the OAuth flow, when the driver requests an access token from the authorization server. If this value is missing or incorrect, authentication fails with either an invalid_client or an unauthorized_client error.

OAuthClientSecret is one of the key connection parameters that need to be set before users can authenticate via OAuth. You can obtain this value from your identity provider when registering the OAuth application.

Notes:

  • This value should be stored securely and never exposed in public repositories, scripts, or unsecured environments.
  • Client secrets may also expire after a set period. Be sure to monitor expiration dates and rotate secrets as needed to maintain uninterrupted access.

For more information on how this property is used when configuring a connection, see Establishing a Connection

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthAccessToken

Specifies the OAuth access token used to authenticate requests to the data source. This token is issued by the authorization server after a successful OAuth exchange.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

OAuthAccessToken is a temporary credential that authorizes access to protected resources. It is typically returned by the identity provider after the user or client application completes an OAuth authentication flow. This property is most commonly used in automated workflows or custom OAuth implementations where you want to manage token handling outside of the driver.

The OAuth access token has a server-dependent timeout, limiting user access. The timeout is set using the OAuthExpiresIn property. However, it can be reissued between requests to keep access alive as long as the user keeps working.

If InitiateOAuth is set to REFRESH, we recommend that you also set both OAuthExpiresIn and OAuthTokenTimestamp. The connector uses these properties to determine when the token expires so it can refresh most efficiently. If OAuthExpiresIn and OAuthTokenTimestamp are not specified, the connector refreshes the token immediately.

Note: Access tokens should be treated as sensitive credentials and stored securely. Avoid exposing them in logs, scripts, or configuration files that are not access-controlled.

For more information on how this property is used when configuring a connection, see Establishing a Connection.

CData Python Connector for Box

SubjectId

The user subject for which the application is requesting delegated access.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

Id of the user or enterprise, based on the configuration set in SubjectType.

CData Python Connector for Box

SubjectType

The Subject Type for the Client Credentials authentication.

Possible Values

enterprise, user

Data Type

string

Default Value

"enterprise"

Remarks

The Subject Type for the Client Credentials authentication. Set this to "enterprise" or "user" depending on the type of token being requested.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthSettingsLocation

Specifies the location of the settings file where OAuth values are saved.

Data Type

string

Default Value

"%APPDATA%\\CData\\Box Data Provider\\OAuthSettings.txt"

Remarks

Storing OAuth settings in a central location avoids the need for users to enter OAuth connection properties manually each time they log in. It also enables credentials to be shared across connections or processes.

You can store OAuth values in a central file for shared access to those values, in either of the following ways:

  • Set InitiateOAuth to either GETANDREFRESH or REFRESH and specify a filepath to the OAuth settings file.
  • Use memory storage to load the credentials into static memory.

The following sections provide more detail on each of these methods.

Specifying the OAuthSettingsLocation Filepath

The default OAuth setting location is %APPDATA%\\CData\\Box Data Provider\\OAuthSettings.txt, with %APPDATA% set to the user's configuration directory. Default values vary, depending on the user's operating system.

  • Windows (ODBC and Power BI): registry://%DSN%
  • Windows: %APPDATA%CDataBox Data Provider\OAuthSettings.txt
  • Mac: %APPDATA%/CData/Box Data Provider/OAuthSettings.txt
  • Linux: %APPDATA%/CData/Box Data Provider/OAuthSettings.txt

Loading Credentials Via Memory Storage

Memory locations are specified by using a value starting with memory://, followed by a unique identifier for that set of credentials (for example, memory://user1). The identifier can be anything you choose, but it should be unique to the user.

Unlike file-based storage, where credentials persist across connections, memory storage loads the credentials into static memory and the credentials are shared between connections using the same identifier for the life of the process. To persist credentials outside the current process, you must manually store the credentials prior to closing the connection. This enables you to set them in the connection when the process is started again.

To retrieve OAuth property values, query the sys_connection_props system table. If there are multiple connections using the same credentials, the properties are read from the previously closed connection.

Supported Storage Types

  • memory://: Stores OAuth tokens in-memory (unique identifier, shared within same process, etc.)
  • registry://: Only supported in the Windows ODBC and Power BI editions. Stores OAuth tokens in the registry under the DSN settings. Must end in a DSN name like registry://CData Python Connector for Box Data Source, or registry://%DSN%.
  • %DSN%: The name of the DSN you are connecting with.
  • Default (no prefix): Stores OAuth tokens within files. The value can be either an absolute path, or a path starting with %APPDATA% or %PROGRAMFILES%.

For more information on how this property is used when configuring a connection, see Establishing a Connection.

CData Python Connector for Box

CallbackURL

Identifies the URL users return to after authenticating to Box via OAuth (Custom OAuth applications only).

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

If you created a custom OAuth application, the OAuth authorization server redirects the user to this URL during the authentication process. This value must match the callback URL you specified when you configured the custom OAuth application.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthVerifier

Specifies a verifier code returned from the OAuthAuthorizationURL . Used when authenticating to OAuth on a headless server, where a browser can't be launched. Requires both OAuthSettingsLocation and OAuthVerifier to be set.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

For detailed instructions about how to obtain the OAuthVerifier value, see Establishing a Connection.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthRefreshToken

Specifies the OAuth refresh token used to request a new access token after the original has expired.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The refresh token is used to obtain a new access token when the current one expires. It enables seamless authentication for long-running or automated workflows without requiring the user to log in again. This property is especially important in headless, CI/CD, or server-based environments where interactive authentication is not possible.

The refresh token is typically obtained during the initial OAuth exchange by calling the GetOAuthAccessToken stored procedure. After that, it can be set using this property to enable automatic token refresh, or passed to the RefreshOAuthAccessTokenproc; stored procedure if you prefer to manage the refresh manually.

When InitiateOAuth is set to REFRESH, the driver uses this token to retrieve a new access token automatically. After the first refresh, the driver saves updated tokens in the location defined by OAuthSettingsLocation, and uses those values for subsequent connections.

Note: The OAuthRefreshToken should be handled securely and stored in a trusted location. Like access tokens, refresh tokens can expire or be revoked depending on the identity provider’s policies.

For more information on how this property is used when configuring a connection, see Establishing a Connection.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthExpiresIn

Specifies the duration in seconds, of an OAuth Access Token's lifetime. The token can be reissued to keep access alive as long as the user keeps working.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The OAuth Access Token is assigned to an authenticated user, granting that user access to the network for a specified period of time. The access token is used in place of the user's login ID and password, which stay on the server.

An access token created by the server is only valid for a limited time. OAuthExpiresIn is the number of seconds the token is valid from when it was created. For example, a token generated at 2024-01-29 20:00:00 UTC that expires at 2024-01-29 21:00:00 UTC (an hour later) would have an OAuthExpiresIn value of 3600, no matter what the current time is.

To determine how long the user has before the Access Token will expire, check OAuthTokenTimestamp.

CData Python Connector for Box

OAuthTokenTimestamp

Displays a Unix epoch timestamp in milliseconds that shows how long ago the current access token was created.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The OAuth access token is assigned to an authenticated user, granting that user access to the network for a specified period of time. The access token is used in place of the user's login ID and password, which stay on the server.

An access token created by the server is only valid for a limited time. OAuthTokenTimestamp is the Unix timestamp when the server created the token. For example, OAuthTokenTimestamp=1706558400 indicates the OAuthAccessToken was generated by the server at 2024-01-29 20:00:00 UTC.

CData Python Connector for Box

SSL

This section provides a complete list of the SSL properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
SSLServerCertSpecifies the certificate to be accepted from the server when connecting using TLS/SSL.
CData Python Connector for Box

SSLServerCert

Specifies the certificate to be accepted from the server when connecting using TLS/SSL.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

If you are using a TLS/SSL connection, use this property to specify the TLS/SSL certificate to be accepted from the server. If you specify a value for this property, all other certificates that are not trusted by the machine are rejected.

This property can take the following forms:

Description Example
A full PEM Certificate (example shortened for brevity) -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIChTCCAe4CAQAwDQYJKoZIhv......Qw==
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
A path to a local file containing the certificate C:\cert.cer
The public key (example shortened for brevity) -----BEGIN RSA PUBLIC KEY-----
MIGfMA0GCSq......AQAB
-----END RSA PUBLIC KEY-----
The MD5 Thumbprint (hex values can also be either space- or colon-separated) ecadbdda5a1529c58a1e9e09828d70e4
The SHA1 Thumbprint (hex values can also be either space- or colon-separated) 34a929226ae0819f2ec14b4a3d904f801cbb150d

Note: It is possible to use '*' to signify that all certificates should be accepted, but due to security concerns this is not recommended.

CData Python Connector for Box

Firewall

This section provides a complete list of the Firewall properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
FirewallTypeSpecifies the protocol the provider uses to tunnel traffic through a proxy-based firewall.
FirewallServerIdentifies the IP address, DNS name, or host name of a proxy used to traverse a firewall and relay user queries to network resources.
FirewallPortSpecifies the TCP port to be used for a proxy-based firewall.
FirewallUserIdentifies the user ID of the account authenticating to a proxy-based firewall.
FirewallPasswordSpecifies the password of the user account authenticating to a proxy-based firewall.
CData Python Connector for Box

FirewallType

Specifies the protocol the provider uses to tunnel traffic through a proxy-based firewall.

Possible Values

NONE, TUNNEL, SOCKS4, SOCKS5

Data Type

string

Default Value

"NONE"

Remarks

A proxy-based firewall (or proxy firewall) is a network security device that acts as an intermediary between user requests and the resources they access. The proxy accepts the request of an authenticated user, tunnels through the firewall, and transmits the request to the appropriate server.

Because the proxy evaluates and transfers data backets on behalf of the requesting users, the users never connect directly with the servers, only with the proxy.

Note: By default, the connector connects to the system proxy. To disable this behavior and connect to one of the following proxy types, set ProxyAutoDetect to false.

The following table provides port number information for each of the supported protocols.

Protocol Default Port Description
TUNNEL 80 The port where the connector opens a connection to Box. Traffic flows back and forth via the proxy at this location.
SOCKS4 1080 The port where the connector opens a connection to Box. SOCKS 4 then passes theFirewallUser value to the proxy, which determines whether the connection request should be granted.
SOCKS5 1080 The port where the connector sends data to Box. If the SOCKS 5 proxy requires authentication, set FirewallUser and FirewallPassword to credentials the proxy recognizes.

To connect to HTTP proxies, use ProxyServer and ProxyPort. To authenticate to HTTP proxies, use ProxyAuthScheme, ProxyUser, and ProxyPassword.

CData Python Connector for Box

FirewallServer

Identifies the IP address, DNS name, or host name of a proxy used to traverse a firewall and relay user queries to network resources.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

A proxy-based firewall (or proxy firewall) is a network security device that acts as an intermediary between user requests and the resources they access. The proxy accepts the request of an authenticated user, tunnels through the firewall, and transmits the request to the appropriate server.

Because the proxy evaluates and transfers data backets on behalf of the requesting users, the users never connect directly with the servers, only with the proxy.

CData Python Connector for Box

FirewallPort

Specifies the TCP port to be used for a proxy-based firewall.

Data Type

int

Default Value

0

Remarks

A proxy-based firewall (or proxy firewall) is a network security device that acts as an intermediary between user requests and the resources they access. The proxy accepts the request of an authenticated user, tunnels through the firewall, and transmits the request to the appropriate server.

Because the proxy evaluates and transfers data backets on behalf of the requesting users, the users never connect directly with the servers, only with the proxy.

CData Python Connector for Box

FirewallUser

Identifies the user ID of the account authenticating to a proxy-based firewall.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

A proxy-based firewall (or proxy firewall) is a network security device that acts as an intermediary between user requests and the resources they access. The proxy accepts the request of an authenticated user, tunnels through the firewall, and transmits the request to the appropriate server.

Because the proxy evaluates and transfers data backets on behalf of the requesting users, the users never connect directly with the servers, only with the proxy.

CData Python Connector for Box

FirewallPassword

Specifies the password of the user account authenticating to a proxy-based firewall.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

A proxy-based firewall (or proxy firewall) is a network security device that acts as an intermediary between user requests and the resources they access. The proxy accepts the request of an authenticated user, tunnels through the firewall, and transmits the request to the appropriate server.

Because the proxy evaluates and transfers data backets on behalf of the requesting users, the users never connect directly with the servers, only with the proxy.

CData Python Connector for Box

Proxy

This section provides a complete list of the Proxy properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
ProxyAutoDetectSpecifies whether the provider checks your system proxy settings for existing proxy server configurations, rather than using a manually specified proxy server.
ProxyServerIdentifies the hostname or IP address of the proxy server through which you want to route HTTP traffic.
ProxyPortIdentifies the TCP port on your specified proxy server that has been reserved for routing HTTP traffic to and from the client.
ProxyAuthSchemeSpecifies the authentication method the provider uses when authenticating to the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.
ProxyUserProvides the username of a user account registered with the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.
ProxyPasswordSpecifies the password of the user specified in the ProxyUser connection property.
ProxySSLTypeSpecifies the SSL type to use when connecting to the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.
ProxyExceptionsSpecifies a semicolon-separated list of destination hostnames or IPs that are exempt from connecting through the proxy server set in the ProxyServer connection property.
CData Python Connector for Box

ProxyAutoDetect

Specifies whether the provider checks your system proxy settings for existing proxy server configurations, rather than using a manually specified proxy server.

Data Type

bool

Default Value

true

Remarks

When this connection property is set to True, the connector checks your system proxy settings for existing proxy server configurations (no need to manually supply proxy server details).

This connection property takes precedence over other proxy settings. If you want to configure the connector to connect to a specific proxy server, set ProxyAutoDetect to False.

On Windows, the connector reads the proxy settings from the Internet Options in the registry, specifically the registry key HKCU\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\. On Windows 10 and later, this corresponds to the Proxy Settings found in the Windows Settings.

Note that these settings apply only to the current user of the machine. If you're running an application as a service, the connector does not read your own user's settings. You must instead manually supply the proxy settings in the connector's connection properties.

On Mac, the connector reads proxy settings from the system-configured CFNetwork settings.

On Linux, this property is unsupported, and is set to False by default.

To connect to an HTTP proxy, see ProxyServer. For other proxies, such as SOCKS or tunneling, see FirewallType.

CData Python Connector for Box

ProxyServer

Identifies the hostname or IP address of the proxy server through which you want to route HTTP traffic.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The connector only routes HTTP traffic through the proxy server specified in this connection property when ProxyAutoDetect is set to False.

If ProxyAutoDetect is set to True (the default), the connector instead routes HTTP traffic through the proxy server specified in your system proxy settings.

CData Python Connector for Box

ProxyPort

Identifies the TCP port on your specified proxy server that has been reserved for routing HTTP traffic to and from the client.

Data Type

int

Default Value

80

Remarks

The connector only routes HTTP traffic through the ProxyServer port specified in this connection property when ProxyAutoDetect is set to False.

If ProxyAutoDetect is set to True (the default), the connector instead routes HTTP traffic through the proxy server port specified in your system proxy settings.

For other proxy types, see FirewallType.

CData Python Connector for Box

ProxyAuthScheme

Specifies the authentication method the provider uses when authenticating to the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.

Possible Values

BASIC, DIGEST, NONE, NEGOTIATE, NTLM

Data Type

string

Default Value

"BASIC"

Remarks

Note: The connector only uses this ProxyAuthScheme when ProxyAutoDetect is set to False. If ProxyAutoDetect is set to True (the default), the connector instead uses the authentication method specified in your system proxy settings.

Supported authentication types :

  • BASIC: The connector performs HTTP basic authentication.
  • DIGEST: The connector performs HTTP digest authentication.
  • NTLM: The connector retrieves an NTLM token.
  • NEGOTIATE: The connector retrieves an NTLM or Kerberos token based on the applicable protocol for authentication.
  • NONE: Signifies that the ProxyServer does not require authentication.

For all values other than NONE, you must also set the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword connection properties.

If you need to use another authentication type, such as SOCKS 5 authentication, see FirewallType.

CData Python Connector for Box

ProxyUser

Provides the username of a user account registered with the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The ProxyUser and ProxyPassword connection properties are used to connect and authenticate against the HTTP proxy specified in ProxyServer.

After selecting one of the available authentication types in ProxyAuthScheme, set this property as follows:

ProxyAuthScheme Value Value to set for ProxyUser
BASIC The username of a user registered with the proxy server.
DIGEST The username of a user registered with the proxy server.
NEGOTIATE The username of a Windows user who is a valid user in the domain or trusted domain that the proxy server is part of, in the format user@domain or domain\user.
NTLM The username of a Windows user who is a valid user in the domain or trusted domain that the proxy server is part of, in the format user@domain or domain\user.
NONE Do not set the ProxyPassword connection property.

Note: The connector only uses this username if ProxyAutoDetect is set to False. If ProxyAutoDetect is set to True (the default), the connector instead uses the username specified in your system proxy settings.

CData Python Connector for Box

ProxyPassword

Specifies the password of the user specified in the ProxyUser connection property.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The ProxyUser and ProxyPassword connection properties are used to connect and authenticate against the HTTP proxy specified in ProxyServer.

After selecting one of the available authentication types in ProxyAuthScheme, set this property as follows:

ProxyAuthScheme Value Value to set for ProxyPassword
BASIC The password associated with the proxy server user specified in ProxyUser.
DIGEST The password associated with the proxy server user specified in ProxyUser.
NEGOTIATE The password associated with the Windows user account specified in ProxyUser.
NTLM The password associated with the Windows user account specified in ProxyUser.
NONE Do not set the ProxyPassword connection property.

For SOCKS 5 authentication or tunneling, see FirewallType.

Note: The connector only uses this password if ProxyAutoDetect is set to False. If ProxyAutoDetect is set to True (the default), the connector instead uses the password specified in your system proxy settings.

CData Python Connector for Box

ProxySSLType

Specifies the SSL type to use when connecting to the proxy server specified in the ProxyServer connection property.

Possible Values

AUTO, ALWAYS, NEVER, TUNNEL

Data Type

string

Default Value

"AUTO"

Remarks

This property determines when to use SSL for the connection to the HTTP proxy specified by ProxyServer. You can set this connection property to the following values :

AUTODefault setting. If ProxyServer is set to an HTTPS URL, the connector uses the TUNNEL option. If ProxyServer is set to an HTTP URL, the component uses the NEVER option.
ALWAYSThe connection is always SSL enabled.
NEVERThe connection is not SSL enabled.
TUNNELThe connection is made through a tunneling proxy. The proxy server opens a connection to the remote host and traffic flows back and forth through the proxy.

CData Python Connector for Box

ProxyExceptions

Specifies a semicolon-separated list of destination hostnames or IPs that are exempt from connecting through the proxy server set in the ProxyServer connection property.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The ProxyServer is used for all addresses, except for addresses defined in this property. Use semicolons to separate entries.

Note: The connector uses the system proxy settings by default, without further configuration needed. If you want to explicitly configure proxy exceptions for this connection, set ProxyAutoDetect to False.

CData Python Connector for Box

Logging

This section provides a complete list of the Logging properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
LogfileSpecifies the file path to the log file where the provider records its activities, such as authentication, query execution, and connection details.
VerbositySpecifies the verbosity level of the log file, which controls the amount of detail logged. Supported values range from 1 to 5.
LogModulesSpecifies the core modules to include in the log file. Use a semicolon-separated list of module names. By default, all modules are logged.
MaxLogFileSizeSpecifies the maximum size of a single log file in bytes. For example, '10 MB'. When the file reaches the limit, the provider creates a new log file with the date and time appended to the name.
MaxLogFileCountSpecifies the maximum number of log files the provider retains. When the limit is reached, the oldest log file is deleted to make space for a new one.
CData Python Connector for Box

Logfile

Specifies the file path to the log file where the provider records its activities, such as authentication, query execution, and connection details.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property specifies the location and name of the log file where the connector records its operations, including authentication events, query execution, and connection details. If the specified file does not exist, the connector creates it. Ensure that the user or the service running the connector has write access to the specified path or file. Without sufficient permissions, the log file is not created.

Sensitive information from the connection string, such as passwords and tokens, is automatically masked in the logs. However, sensitive information present in the data itself may not be masked.

If you specify a relative path for Logfile, and if the Location property is set, that directory is used as the base path for the log file.

Additional properties allow you to customize logging behavior:

CData Python Connector for Box

Verbosity

Specifies the verbosity level of the log file, which controls the amount of detail logged. Supported values range from 1 to 5.

Data Type

string

Default Value

"1"

Remarks

This property defines the level of detail the connector includes in the log file. Higher verbosity levels increase the detail of the logged information, but may also result in larger log files and slower performance due to the additional data being captured.

The default verbosity level is 1, which is recommended for regular operation. Higher verbosity levels are primarily intended for debugging purposes. For more information on each level, refer to Logging.

When combined with the LogModules property, Verbosity can refine logging to specific categories of information.

CData Python Connector for Box

LogModules

Specifies the core modules to include in the log file. Use a semicolon-separated list of module names. By default, all modules are logged.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The connector writes details about each operation it performs into the logfile specified by the Logfile connection property.

Each of these logged operations are assigned to a themed category called a module, and each module has a corresponding short code used to labels individual connector operations as belonging to that module.

When this connection property is set to a semicolon-separated list of module codes, only operations belonging to the specified modules are written to the logfile. Note that this only affects which operations are logged moving forward and doesn't retroactively alter the existing contents of the logfile. For example: INFO;EXEC;SSL;META;

By default, logged operations from all modules are included.

You can explicitly exclude a module by prefixing it with a "-". For example: -HTTP

To apply filters to submodules, identify them with the syntax <module name>.<submodule name>. For example, the following value causes the connector to only log actions belonging to the HTTP module, and further refines it to exclude actions belonging to the Res submodule of the HTTP module: HTTP;-HTTP.Res

Note that the logfile filtering triggered by the Verbosity connection property takes precedence over the filtering imposed by this connection property. This means that operations of a higher verbosity level than the level specified in the Verbosity connection property are not printed in the logfile, even if they belong to one of the modules specified in this connection property.

The available modules and submodules are:

Module Name Module Description Submodules
INFO General Information. Includes the connection string, product version (build number), and initial connection messages.
  • Connec – Information related to creating or destroying connections.
  • Messag – Generic label for messages pertaining to connections, the connection string, and product version. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
EXEC Query Execution. Includes execution messages for user-written SQL queries, parsed SQL queries, and normalized SQL queries. Success/failure messages for queries and query pages appear here as well.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to query execution. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • Normlz – Query normalization steps. Query normalization is when the product takes the user-submitted query and rewrites the query to get the same results with optimal performance.
  • Origin – This label applies to any messages recording a user's original query (the exact, unaltered, non-normalized query executed by the user).
  • Page – Messages related to query paging.
  • Parsed – Query parsing steps. Parsing is the process of converting the user-submitted query into a standardized format for easier processing.
HTTP HTTP protocol messages. Includes HTTP requests/responses (including POST messages), as well as Kerberos related messages.
  • KERB – HTTP requests related to Kerberos.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to HTTP protocols. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • Unpack – This label applies to messages about zipped data being returned from the service API and unpacked by the product.
  • Res – Messages containing HTTP responses.
  • Req – Messages containing HTTP requests.
WSDL Messages pertaining to the generation of WSDL/XSD files.
SSL SSL certificate messages.
  • Certif – Messages pertaining to SSL certificates.
AUTH Authentication related failure/success messages.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to authentication. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • OAuth – Messages related to OAuth authentication.
  • Krbros – Kerberos-related authentication messages.
SQL Includes SQL transactions, SQL bulk transfer messages, and SQL result set messages.
  • Bulk – Messages pertaining to bulk query execution.
  • Cache – Messages related to reading row data from and writing row data to the product's cache for better performance.
  • Messag – Messages pertaining to SQL transactions. These messages are typically specific to the connector, rather than being received and passed along directly from the service.
  • ResSet – Query resultsets.
  • Transc – Messages related to handling transactions, including information about the number of jobs executed and backup table handling.
META Metadata cache and schema messages.
  • Cache – Messages related to reading from and modifying column and table definitions in the product's cache for better performance.
  • Schema – Messages related to retrieving metadata from or modifying the service schema.
  • MemSto – Messages related to writing to or reading from in-memory metadata cache.
  • Storag – Messages relating to storing metadata on disk or in an external data store, rather than in memory.
FUNC Information related to executing SQL functions.
  • Errmsg – Error messages related to executing SQL functions.
TCP Incoming and outgoing raw bytes on TCP transport layer messages.
  • Send – Raw data sent via the TCP protocol.
  • Receiv – Raw data received via the TCP protocol.
FTP Messages pertaining to the File Transfer Protocol.
  • Info – Status messages related to communication in the FTP protocol.
  • Client – Messages related to actions taken by the FTP client (the product) during FTP communication.
  • Server – Messages related to actions taken by the FTP server during FTP communication.
SFTP Messages pertaining to the Secure File Transfer Protocol.
  • Info – Status messages related to communication in the SFTP protocol.
  • To_Server – Messages related to actions taken by the SFTP client (the product) during SFTP communication.
  • From_Server – Messages related to actions taken by the SFTP server during SFTP communication.
POP Messages pertaining to data transferred via the Post Office Protocol.
  • Client – Messages related to actions taken by the POP client (the product) during POP communication.
  • Server – Messages related to actions taken by the POP server during POP communication.
  • Status – Status messages related to communication in the POP protocol.
SMTP Messages pertaining to data transferred via the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
  • Client – Messages related to actions taken by the SMTP client (the product) during SMTP communication.
  • Server – Messages related to actions taken by the SMTP server during SMTP communication.
  • Status – Status messages related to communication in the SMTP protocol.
CORE Messages relating to various internal product operations not covered by other modules.
DEMN Messages related to SQL remoting.
CLJB Messages about bulk data uploads (cloud job).
  • Commit – Submissions for bulk data uploads.
SRCE Miscellaneous messages produced by the product that don't belong in any other module.
TRANCE Advanced messages concerning low-level product operations.

CData Python Connector for Box

MaxLogFileSize

Specifies the maximum size of a single log file in bytes. For example, '10 MB'. When the file reaches the limit, the provider creates a new log file with the date and time appended to the name.

Data Type

string

Default Value

"100MB"

Remarks

For values lower than 100 KB, the connector uses 100 KB as the minimum allowable size.

To control the total number of log files retained, use the MaxLogFileCount property in conjunction with this property. Together, these properties allow you to manage the size and retention of log files effectively.

CData Python Connector for Box

MaxLogFileCount

Specifies the maximum number of log files the provider retains. When the limit is reached, the oldest log file is deleted to make space for a new one.

Data Type

int

Default Value

-1

Remarks

Each log file name includes the date and time for easier identification.

This property accepts the following values:

  • A value of 2 or higher sets the maximum number of log files retained.
  • A value of 1 retains only one log file. When it reaches the maximum size, the file is deleted and replaced by a new one, leaving no history beyond the current log.
  • A value of 0 or negative indicates no limit on the number of log files, and logging continues indefinitely.

To manage log file size, use the MaxLogFileSize property. The two properties work together to control the size and retention of log files in the logging folder.

CData Python Connector for Box

Schema

This section provides a complete list of the Schema properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
LocationSpecifies the location of a directory containing schema files that define tables, views, and stored procedures. Depending on your service's requirements, this may be expressed as either an absolute path or a relative path.
BrowsableSchemasOptional setting that restricts the schemas reported to a subset of all available schemas. For example, BrowsableSchemas=SchemaA,SchemaB,SchemaC .
TablesOptional setting that restricts the tables reported to a subset of all available tables. For example, Tables=TableA,TableB,TableC .
ViewsOptional setting that restricts the views reported to a subset of the available tables. For example, Views=ViewA,ViewB,ViewC .
CData Python Connector for Box

Location

Specifies the location of a directory containing schema files that define tables, views, and stored procedures. Depending on your service's requirements, this may be expressed as either an absolute path or a relative path.

Data Type

string

Default Value

"%APPDATA%\\CData\\Box Data Provider\\Schema"

Remarks

The Location property is only needed if you want to either customize definitions (for example, change a column name, ignore a column, etc.) or extend the data model with new tables, views, or stored procedures.

If left unspecified, the default location is %APPDATA%\\CData\\Box Data Provider\\Schema, where %APPDATA% is set to the user's configuration directory:

Platform %APPDATA%
Windows The value of the APPDATA environment variable
Linux ~/.config

CData Python Connector for Box

BrowsableSchemas

Optional setting that restricts the schemas reported to a subset of all available schemas. For example, BrowsableSchemas=SchemaA,SchemaB,SchemaC .

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

Listing all available database schemas can take extra time, thus degrading performance. Providing a list of schemas in the connection string saves time and improves performance.

CData Python Connector for Box

Tables

Optional setting that restricts the tables reported to a subset of all available tables. For example, Tables=TableA,TableB,TableC .

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

Listing all available tables from some databases can take extra time, thus degrading performance. Providing a list of tables in the connection string saves time and improves performance.

If there are lots of tables available and you already know which ones you want to work with, you can use this property to restrict your viewing to only those tables. To do this, specify the tables you want in a comma-separated list. Each table should be a valid SQL identifier with any special characters escaped using square brackets, double-quotes or backticks. For example, Tables=TableA,[TableB/WithSlash],WithCatalog.WithSchema.`TableC With Space`.

Note: If you are connecting to a data source with multiple schemas or catalogs, you must specify each table you want to view by its fully qualified name. This avoids ambiguity between tables that may exist in multiple catalogs or schemas.

CData Python Connector for Box

Views

Optional setting that restricts the views reported to a subset of the available tables. For example, Views=ViewA,ViewB,ViewC .

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

Listing all available views from some databases can take extra time, thus degrading performance. Providing a list of views in the connection string saves time and improves performance.

If there are lots of views available and you already know which ones you want to work with, you can use this property to restrict your viewing to only those views. To do this, specify the views you want in a comma-separated list. Each view should be a valid SQL identifier with any special characters escaped using square brackets, double-quotes or backticks. For example, Views=ViewA,[ViewB/WithSlash],WithCatalog.WithSchema.`ViewC With Space`.

Note: If you are connecting to a data source with multiple schemas or catalogs, you must specify each view you want to examine by its fully qualified name. This avoids ambiguity between views that may exist in multiple catalogs or schemas.

CData Python Connector for Box

Caching

This section provides a complete list of the Caching properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
AutoCacheSpecifies whether the content of tables targeted by SELECT queries is automatically cached to the specified cache database.
CacheProviderThe namespace of an ADO.NET provider. The specified provider is used as the target database for all caching operations.
CacheDriverThe driver class of a JDBC driver. The specified driver is used to connect to the target database for all caching operations.
CacheConnectionSpecifies the connection string for the specified cache database.
CacheLocationSpecifies the path to the cache when caching to a file.
CacheToleranceNotes the tolerance, in seconds, for stale data in the specified cache database. Requires AutoCache to be set to True.
OfflineGets the data from the specified cache database instead of live Box data.
CacheMetadataDetermines whether the provider caches table metadata to a file-based cache database.
CData Python Connector for Box

AutoCache

Specifies whether the content of tables targeted by SELECT queries is automatically cached to the specified cache database.

Data Type

bool

Default Value

false

Remarks

When this connection property is set to True, the connector automatically caches the contents of tables targeted by SELECT queries. The content of these tables is cached to the cache database specified by the CacheConnection and CacheProvider connection properties.

See Also

For additional information, see:

  • CacheMetadata: With CacheMetadata enabled, all retrieved metadata is mirrored in the cache database. This means that any subsequent attempts by the connector to discover metadata are much faster, as this metadata is then read directly from the cache database, without needing to spend time requesting metadata from Box.
  • Explicitly Caching Data: This topic provides examples for using AutoCache in Offline mode.
  • CACHE Statements: You can use the CACHE statement to explicitly cache the content of any table targeted by a SELECT query.

CData Python Connector for Box

CacheProvider

The namespace of an ADO.NET provider. The specified provider is used as the target database for all caching operations.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

You can cache to ADO.NET providers saved in your ADO.NET global assembly cache (GAC).

CData ADO.NET providers automatically register themselves with the GAC during installation, so you don't need to do so manually.

Third-party ADO.NET providers may or may not automatically register themselves with the GAC during installation. If you want to cache to a third-party ADO.NET provider, consult the documentation for that provider to determine what steps (if any) you must take to register them with the GAC. Once they have been registered, you can supply their namespace in this connection property.

You must also set the CacheConnection connection property to provide a connection string for the specified ADO.NET provider.

The following sections show connection examples and address other requirements for several popular database providers. Refer to CacheConnection for more information on typical connection properties.

SQLite

You can use the Microsoft ADO.NET Provider for SQLite to cache to SQLite databases.

CacheProvider=Microsoft.Data.Sqlite;CacheConnection='DataSource=C:\\Users\\Public\\cache.db;'InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;

MySQL

To cache to MySQL, you can use the CData ADO.NET Provider for MySQL:
Cache Provider=System.Data.CData.MySQL;Cache Connection='Server=localhost;Port=3306;Database=cache;User=root;Password=123456';User=myUser;Password=myPassword;Security Token=myToken;

SQL Server

You can use the Microsoft .NET Framework Provider for SQL Server, included in the .NET Framework, to cache to SQL Server:

Cache Provider=System.Data.SqlClient;Cache Connection="Server=MyMACHINE\MyInstance;Database=SQLCACHE;User Id=root;Password=admin";InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;

Oracle

To cache to Oracle, you can use the Oracle Data Provider for .NET, as shown in the following example:

Cache Provider=Oracle.DataAccess.Client;Cache Connection='User Id=scott;Password=tiger;Data Source=ORCL';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;

The Oracle Data Provider for .NET also requires the Oracle Database Client. When you download the Oracle Database Client, ensure that its bitness matches the bitness of your machine. When you install, select either the Runtime or Administrator installation type. The Instant Client is not sufficient.

PostgreSQL

To cache to PostgreSQL, you can use the CData ADO.NET Provider for PostgreSQL:
Cache Provider=System.Data.CData.PostgreSQL;Cache Connection='Server=localhost;Port=5432;Database=cache;User=postgres;Password=123456';User=myUser;Password=myPassword;Security Token=myToken;

CData Python Connector for Box

CacheDriver

The driver class of a JDBC driver. The specified driver is used to connect to the target database for all caching operations.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

You can cache to any database for which you have a JDBC driver, including CData JDBC drivers.

Note: You must add the JAR file of the specified JDBC driver to the classpath. For CData JDBC drivers, you can find this JAR file in the "lib" subfolder of that driver's installation directory.

You must also set the CacheConnection connection property to provide a connection string for the specified JDBC driver.

For Linux systems and macOS, you need to create a config.ini file on the installation path of the driver (site-packages/cdata). The config.ini file has the following format (the driver and the path of the JDBC driver):

[salesforce.cpython-38-x86_64-linux-gnu.so]
CLASSPATH = /home/usrname/Downloads/lib/cdata.jdbc.postgresql.jar

Examples

The following examples show how to cache to several major databases. For more information on the JDBC URL syntax and typical connection properties, see CacheConnection.

Derby and Java DB

Java DB is the Oracle distribution of Derby. You must add the Derby JDBC driver's JAR file, derbytools.jar, to your classpath to cache to Java DB.

The Derby JDBC driver's JAR file is bundled in db-derby-10.17.1.0-bin.zip, which you can download from this page. You can find derbytools.jar in the "lib" subfolder of this zip file.

After adding derbytools.jar to the classpath, you can cache to a Java DB database as follows:

jdbc:box:CacheDriver=org.apache.derby.jdbc.EmbeddedDriver;CacheConnection='jdbc:derby:sample';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;
To cache to an in-memory database, use a JDBC URL like the following:
jdbc:box:CacheDriver=org.apache.derby.jdbc.EmbeddedDriver;CacheConnection='jdbc:derby:memory';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;

SQLite

The following is a JDBC URL for the SQLite JDBC driver:

jdbc:box:CacheDriver=org.sqlite.JDBC;CacheConnection='jdbc:sqlite:C:/Temp/sqlite.db';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;

MySQL

The following is a JDBC URL for the CData JDBC Driver for MySQL:

  jdbc:box:Cache Driver=cdata.jdbc.mysql.MySQLDriver;Cache Connection='jdbc:mysql:Server=localhost;Port=3306;Database=cache;User=root;Password=123456';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;
  

SQL Server

The following JDBC URL uses the Microsoft JDBC Driver for SQL Server:

jdbc:box:Cache Driver=com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriver;Cache Connection='jdbc:sqlserver://localhost\sqlexpress:7437;user=sa;password=123456;databaseName=Cache';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;

Oracle

The following is a JDBC URL for the Oracle Thin Client:

jdbc:box:Cache Driver=oracle.jdbc.OracleDriver;CacheConnection='jdbc:oracle:thin:scott/tiger@localhost:1521:orcldb';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;
NOTE: If using a version of Oracle older than 9i, the cache driver will instead be oracle.jdbc.driver.OracleDriver .

PostgreSQL

The following JDBC URL uses the official PostgreSQL JDBC driver:

jdbc:box:CacheDriver=cdata.jdbc.postgresql.PostgreSQLDriver;CacheConnection='jdbc:postgresql:User=postgres;Password=admin;Database=postgres;Server=localhost;Port=5432;';InitiateOAuth=GETANDREFRESH;

CData Python Connector for Box

CacheConnection

Specifies the connection string for the specified cache database.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

The target cache database is determined by a combination of this connection property and the CacheProvider connection property. Both properties are required to use the specified cache database.

The connection string specified in this connection property is passed directly to the specified in the CacheProvider connection property. Consult the documentation for the specified for more information on its available connection properties.

Examples of common cache database settings can be found below.

SQLite

MySQL

The following are typical connection properties:

  • Server: The IP address or domain name of the server hosting the MySQL database that you want to cache to.
  • Port: The port on the specified server where your MySQL instance is running.
  • Database: The name of the MySQL database that you want to cache to. Must match the name of a MySQL database hosted on the specified server.
  • User: The username of a user registered with the selected MySQL database.
  • Password: The password associated with the specified MySQL user.

SQL Server

The following are typical SQL Server connection properties:

  • Server: The name or network address of the computer running SQL Server. To connect to a named instance instead of the default instance, specify the host name and the instance name, separated by a backslash.
  • Port: The port on the specified server where your SQL Server instance is running.
  • Database: The name of the SQL Server database you want to cache to. Must match the name of a SQL Server database hosted on the specified server.
  • Integrated Security: To use the current Windows account for authentication, set this option to True. To authenticate with User and Password instead, set this option to False.
  • User Id: The username of a user registered with the selected SQL Server database. This property is only needed if you are not using integrated security.
  • Password: The password associated with the specified SQL Server user. This property is only needed if you are not using integrated security.

Oracle

The following are typical connection properties:

  • Data Source: The connect descriptor that identifies the Oracle database. This can be a TNS connect descriptor, an Oracle Net Services name that resolves to a connect descriptor, or, after version 11g, an Easy Connect naming (the host name of the Oracle server with an optional port and service name).

  • User Id: The username of a user registered with the selected Oracle database.
  • Password: The password associated with the specified Oracle user.

PostgreSQL

The following are typical connection properties:

  • Host: The address of the server hosting the PostgreSQL database.
  • Port: The port on the specified host server where your PostgreSQL database is hosted.
  • Database: The name of the PostgreSQL database you want to cache to. Must match the name of a PostgreSQL database hosted on the specified server.
  • User name: The username of a user registered with the selected PostgreSQL database.
  • Password: The password associated with the specified user.

CData Python Connector for Box

CacheLocation

Specifies the path to the cache when caching to a file.

Data Type

string

Default Value

"%APPDATA%\\CData\\Box Data Provider"

Remarks

The CacheLocation is a simple, file-based cache.

If left unspecified, the default location is %APPDATA%\\CData\\Box Data Provider, where %APPDATA% is set to the user's configuration directory:

Platform %APPDATA%
Windows The value of the APPDATA environment variable
Linux ~/.config

See Also

  • AutoCache: Set to implicitly create and maintain a cache for later offline use.
  • CacheMetadata: Set to persist the Box catalog in CacheLocation.

CData Python Connector for Box

CacheTolerance

Notes the tolerance, in seconds, for stale data in the specified cache database. Requires AutoCache to be set to True.

Data Type

int

Default Value

600

Remarks

When you execute a query for tables in the cache, the connector checks the time elapsed since the last update to the cache.

If the last update to the cache is older than the value of this connection property (measured in seconds), the connector refreshes the cache.

Otherwise, the connector returns data directly from the cache.

CData Python Connector for Box

Offline

Gets the data from the specified cache database instead of live Box data.

Data Type

bool

Default Value

false

Remarks

When this connection property is set to True, all queries execute against the cache database instead of the live Box data.

In this mode, some SQL operations like INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, and CACHE are disabled.

CData Python Connector for Box

CacheMetadata

Determines whether the provider caches table metadata to a file-based cache database.

Data Type

bool

Default Value

false

Remarks

When this connection property is set to True, as you execute queries, table metadata in the Box catalog is cached to the cache database specified by CacheConnection and CacheProvider, or, if those connection properties are not set, to the user's home directory.

The location of your home directory varies by platform:

PlatformHome Directory
Windows %APPDATA%\\CData\\Box Data Provider
Mac ~/Library/Application Support/CData/Box Data Provider
Unix ~/.config/CData/Box Data Provider

A table's metadata is retrieved only once, when the table is queried for the first time.

When to Use CacheMetadata

When there are a large number of Box tables and columns for the connector to retrieve during metadata discovery, the connector may take a while to list all table metadata.

You may experience slow metadata retrieval when:

  • Your Box instance naturally has a large table count.
  • The connector has been configured, via its connection properties, to discover more tables than it would under its default configuration.
  • You make many short-lived connections to the connector.
With CacheMetadata enabled, all retrieved metadata is mirrored in the cache database. This means that any subsequent attempts by the connector to discover metadata are much faster, as this metadata is then read directly from the cache database, without needing to spend time requesting metadata from Box.

When Not to Use CacheMetadata

The connector automatically persists metadata in memory for up to an hour when you first discover the metadata for a table or view, so CacheMetadata is generally not necessary.

CacheMetadata is not ideal in scenarios where you are working with volatile metadata. The first time you query a table, the connector caches its metadata to the cache database file. This cache is not dynamically updated to reflect updates to the table schema, so you must delete and rebuild the cache database file to pick up new, changed, or deleted columns.

CData Python Connector for Box

Miscellaneous

This section provides a complete list of the Miscellaneous properties you can configure in the connection string for this provider.


PropertyDescription
AsUserIdSpecifies the Box user ID to impersonate when making API calls. Only supported for Admin, Co-Admin, or Service Accounts.
DirectoryRetrievalDepthSpecifies the maximum folder depth the provider retrieves when querying the Folders and Files tables.
ExposeCollectionViewsDetermines whether to expose every collection in your Box account as separate views.
IncludeCustomFieldsSpecifies whether the provider includes Box metadata templates as custom columns in the Files table.
MaxRowsSpecifies the maximum number of rows returned for queries that do not include either aggregation or GROUP BY.
OtherSpecifies advanced connection properties for specialized scenarios. Use this property only under the guidance of our Support team to address specific issues.
PseudoColumnsSpecifies the pseudocolumns to expose as table columns, expressed as a string in the format 'TableName=ColumnName;TableName=ColumnName'.
ReadonlyToggles read-only access to Box from the provider.
RTKSpecifies the runtime key for licensing the provider. If unset or invalid, the provider defaults to the standard licensing method. This property is only required in environments where the standard licensing method is unsupported or requires a runtime key.
TimeoutSpecifies the maximum time, in seconds, that the provider waits for a server response before throwing a timeout error.
UserDefinedViewsSpecifies a filepath to a JSON configuration file that defines custom views. The provider automatically detects and uses the views specified in this file.
CData Python Connector for Box

AsUserId

Specifies the Box user ID to impersonate when making API calls. Only supported for Admin, Co-Admin, or Service Accounts.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

If you set this property, the connector uses the Box as-user header to act on behalf of the specified user.

This property only works when authenticated with an Admin, Co-Admin, or Service Account.

If a user ID is also provided in a pseudo-column or a stored procedure parameter, those values take precedence over this property.

CData Python Connector for Box

DirectoryRetrievalDepth

Specifies the maximum folder depth the provider retrieves when querying the Folders and Files tables.

Data Type

string

Default Value

"5"

Remarks

This property controls how many levels of nested folders the connector scans when querying the Folders and Files tables.

If this property is not set, the connector uses a default retrieval depth of 5.

Use a lower value to reduce query time in environments with large directory structures, or increase it if you need to access deeply nested files and folders.

CData Python Connector for Box

ExposeCollectionViews

Determines whether to expose every collection in your Box account as separate views.

Data Type

bool

Default Value

false

Remarks

This property determines whether the connector exposes Box Collections as individual queryable views.

If this property is set to true, each Box Collection in your account appears as a separate view that you can query to access its files and folders.

If this property is set to false, Box Collections are not included in the schema.

Enable this property if you want to access curated sets of items stored in Collections directly from your query environment.

CData Python Connector for Box

IncludeCustomFields

Specifies whether the provider includes Box metadata templates as custom columns in the Files table.

Data Type

bool

Default Value

false

Remarks

This property determines whether the connector includes Box metadata templates as custom columns in the Files table.

If this property is set to true, metadata templates defined in your Box environment appear as additional columns when querying the Files table.

If this property is set to false, metadata templates are not included.

Enable this property if you want to retrieve custom metadata fields alongside standard file information.

CData Python Connector for Box

MaxRows

Specifies the maximum number of rows returned for queries that do not include either aggregation or GROUP BY.

Data Type

int

Default Value

-1

Remarks

The default value for this property, -1, means that no row limit is enforced unless the query explicitly includes a LIMIT clause. (When a query includes a LIMIT clause, the value specified in the query takes precedence over the MaxRows setting.)

Setting MaxRows to a whole number greater than 0 ensures that queries do not return excessively large result sets by default.

This property is useful for optimizing performance and preventing excessive resource consumption when executing queries that could otherwise return very large datasets.

CData Python Connector for Box

Other

Specifies advanced connection properties for specialized scenarios. Use this property only under the guidance of our Support team to address specific issues.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property allows advanced users to configure hidden properties for specialized situations, with the advice of our Support team. These settings are not required for normal use cases but can address unique requirements or provide additional functionality. To define multiple properties, use a semicolon-separated list.

Note: It is strongly recommended to set these properties only when advised by the Support team to address specific scenarios or issues.

Caching Configuration

PropertyDescription
CachePartial=TrueCaches only a subset of columns, which you can specify in your query.
QueryPassthrough=TruePasses the specified query to the cache database instead of using the SQL parser of the connector.

Integration and Formatting

PropertyDescription
DefaultColumnSizeSets the default length of string fields when the data source does not provide column length in the metadata. The default value is 2000.
ConvertDateTimeToGMT=TrueConverts date-time values to GMT, instead of the local time of the machine. The default value is False (use local time).
RecordToFile=filenameRecords the underlying socket data transfer to the specified file.

CData Python Connector for Box

PseudoColumns

Specifies the pseudocolumns to expose as table columns, expressed as a string in the format 'TableName=ColumnName;TableName=ColumnName'.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property allows you to define which pseudocolumns the connector exposes as table columns.

To specify individual pseudocolumns, use the following format:

Table1=Column1;Table1=Column2;Table2=Column3

To include all pseudocolumns for all tables use:

*=*

CData Python Connector for Box

Readonly

Toggles read-only access to Box from the provider.

Data Type

bool

Default Value

false

Remarks

When set to True, the connector allows only SELECT queries. Attempting an INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, or stored procedure query fails with an error message.

CData Python Connector for Box

RTK

Specifies the runtime key for licensing the provider. If unset or invalid, the provider defaults to the standard licensing method. This property is only required in environments where the standard licensing method is unsupported or requires a runtime key.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property is typically unnecessary, as most configurations support a standard licensing mechanism.

Warning: The value of this property takes precedence over all existing licensing information. To avoid licensing errors, ensure the provided runtime key is correct.

CData Python Connector for Box

Timeout

Specifies the maximum time, in seconds, that the provider waits for a server response before throwing a timeout error.

Data Type

int

Default Value

60

Remarks

The timeout applies to each individual communication with the server rather than the entire query or operation. For example, a query could continue running beyond 60 seconds if each paging call completes within the timeout limit.

Timeout is set to 60 seconds by default. To disable timeouts, set this property to 0.

Disabling the timeout allows operations to run indefinitely until they succeed or fail due to other conditions such as server-side timeouts, network interruptions, or resource limits on the server.

Note: Use this property cautiously to avoid long-running operations that could degrade performance or result in unresponsive behavior.

CData Python Connector for Box

UserDefinedViews

Specifies a filepath to a JSON configuration file that defines custom views. The provider automatically detects and uses the views specified in this file.

Data Type

string

Default Value

""

Remarks

UserDefinedViews allows you to define and manage custom views through a JSON-formatted configuration file called UserDefinedViews.json. These views are automatically recognized by the connector and enable you to execute custom SQL queries as if they were standard database views. The JSON file defines each view as a root element with a child element called "query", which contains the SQL query for the view.

For example:

{
	"MyView": {
		"query": "SELECT * FROM Files WHERE MyColumn = 'value'"
	},
	"MyView2": {
		"query": "SELECT * FROM MyTable WHERE Id IN (1,2,3)"
	}
}

You can use this property to define multiple views in a single file and specify the filepath. For example:

UserDefinedViews=C:\Path\To\UserDefinedViews.json
When you specify a view in UserDefinedViews, the connector only sees that view.

For further information, see User Defined Views.

CData Python Connector for Box

Third Party Copyrights

LZMA from 7Zip LZMA SDK

LZMA SDK is placed in the public domain.

Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute the original LZMA SDK code, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose, commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.

LZMA2 from XZ SDK

Version 1.9 and older are in the public domain.

Xamarin.Forms

Xamarin SDK

The MIT License (MIT)

Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors

All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

NSIS 3.10

Copyright (C) 1999-2025 Contributors THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE ("AGREEMENT"). ANY USE, REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT'S ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT.

1. DEFINITIONS

"Contribution" means:

a) in the case of the initial Contributor, the initial code and documentation distributed under this Agreement, and b) in the case of each subsequent Contributor:

i) changes to the Program, and

ii) additions to the Program;

where such changes and/or additions to the Program originate from and are distributed by that particular Contributor. A Contribution 'originates' from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by such Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor's behalf. Contributions do not include additions to the Program which: (i) are separate modules of software distributed in conjunction with the Program under their own license agreement, and (ii) are not derivative works of the Program.

"Contributor" means any person or entity that distributes the Program.

"Licensed Patents " mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program.

"Program" means the Contributions distributed in accordance with this Agreement.

"Recipient" means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement, including all Contributors.

2. GRANT OF RIGHTS

a) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free copyright license to reproduce, prepare derivative works of, publicly display, publicly perform, distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, and such derivative works, in source code and object code form.

b) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under Licensed Patents to make, use, sell, offer to sell, import and otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, in source code and object code form. This patent license shall apply to the combination of the Contribution and the Program if, at the time the Contribution is added by the Contributor, such addition of the Contribution causes such combination to be covered by the Licensed Patents. The patent license shall not apply to any other combinations which include the Contribution. No hardware per se is licensed hereunder.

c) Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contributions set forth herein, no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity. Each Contributor disclaims any liability to Recipient for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise. As a condition to exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder, each Recipient hereby assumes sole responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed, if any. For example, if a third party patent license is required to allow Recipient to distribute the Program, it is Recipient's responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Program.

d) Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution, if any, to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement.

3. REQUIREMENTS

A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement, provided that:

a) it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement; and

b) its license agreement:

i) effectively disclaims on behalf of all Contributors all warranties and conditions, express and implied, including warranties or conditions of title and non-infringement, and implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose;

ii) effectively excludes on behalf of all Contributors all liability for damages, including direct, indirect, special, incidental and consequential damages, such as lost profits;

iii) states that any provisions which differ from this Agreement are offered by that Contributor alone and not by any other party; and

iv) states that source code for the Program is available from such Contributor, and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange.

When the Program is made available in source code form:

a) it must be made available under this Agreement; and

b) a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program.

Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright notices contained within the Program.

Each Contributor must identify itself as the originator of its Contribution, if any, in a manner that reasonably allows subsequent Recipients to identify the originator of the Contribution.

4. COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION

Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users, business partners and the like. While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial use of the Program, the Contributor who includes the Program in a commercial product offering should do so in a manner which does not create potential liability for other Contributors. Therefore, if a Contributor includes the Program in a commercial product offering, such Contributor ("Commercial Contributor") hereby agrees to defend and indemnify every other Contributor ("Indemnified Contributor") against any losses, damages and costs (collectively "Losses") arising from claims, lawsuits and other legal actions brought by a third party against the Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor in connection with its distribution of the Program in a commercial product offering. The obligations in this section do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property infringement. In order to qualify, an Indemnified Contributor must: a) promptly notify the Commercial Contributor in writing of such claim, and b) allow the Commercial Contributor to control, and cooperate with the Commercial Contributor in, the defense and any related settlement negotiations. The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense.

For example, a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering, Product X. That Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor. If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance claims, or offers warranties related to Product X, those performance claims and warranties are such Commercial Contributor's responsibility alone. Under this section, the Commercial Contributor would have to defend claims against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties, and if a court requires any other Contributor to pay any damages as a result, the Commercial Contributor must pay those damages.

5. NO WARRANTY

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Each Recipient is solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes all risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement, including but not limited to the risks and costs of program errors, compliance with applicable laws, damage to or loss of data, programs or equipment, and unavailability or interruption of operations.

6. DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, NEITHER RECIPIENT NOR ANY CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS), HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

7. GENERAL

If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agreement, and without further action by the parties hereto, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable.

If Recipient institutes patent litigation against a Contributor with respect to a patent applicable to software (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit), then any patent licenses granted by that Contributor to such Recipient under this Agreement shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. In addition, if Recipient institutes patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Program itself (excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hardware) infringes such Recipient's patent(s), then such Recipient's rights granted under Section 2(b) shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

All Recipient's rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms or conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming aware of such noncompliance. If all Recipient's rights under this Agreement terminate, Recipient agrees to cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable. However, Recipient's obligations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall continue and survive.

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement, but in order to avoid inconsistency the Agreement is copyrighted and may only be modified in the following manner. The Agreement Steward reserves the right to publish new versions (including revisions) of this Agreement from time to time. No one other than the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement. IBM is the initial Agreement Steward. IBM may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a suitable separate entity. Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number. The Program (including Contributions) may always be distributed subject to the version of the Agreement under which it was received. In addition, after a new version of the Agreement is published, Contributor may elect to distribute the Program (including its Contributions) under the new version. Except as expressly stated in Sections 2(a) and 2(b) above, Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any Contributor under this Agreement, whether expressly, by implication, estoppel or otherwise. All rights in the Program not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved.

This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of New York and the intellectual property laws of the United States of America. No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more than one year after the cause of action arose. Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting litigation.

AdoptOpenJDK / Adoptium Temurin JRE 17.0.18_8

Copyright (c) Eclipse Foundation AISBL. All Rights Reserved.

Apache License, Version 2.0

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

  1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
  2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
  3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
  4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Eclipse Distribution License - v 1.0

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

  • Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
  • Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
  • Neither the name of the Eclipse Foundation, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Eclipse Public License - v 2.0

THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS ECLIPSE PUBLIC LICENSE ("AGREEMENT"). ANY USE, REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT'S ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT.

1. DEFINITIONS "Contribution" means:

  • a) in the case of the initial Contributor, the initial content Distributed under this Agreement, and
  • b) in the case of each subsequent Contributor:
    • i) changes to the Program, and
    • ii) additions to the Program;
    where such changes and/or additions to the Program originate from and are Distributed by that particular Contributor. A Contribution "originates" from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by such Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor's behalf. Contributions do not include changes or additions to the Program that are not Modified Works.
"Contributor" means any person or entity that Distributes the Program. "Licensed Patents" mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program.

"Program" means the Contributions Distributed in accordance with this Agreement.

"Recipient" means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement or any Secondary License (as applicable), including Contributors.

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source Code or other form, that is based on (or derived from) the Program and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship.

"Modified Works" shall mean any work in Source Code or other form that results from an addition to, deletion from, or modification of the contents of the Program, including, for purposes of clarity any new file in Source Code form that contains any contents of the Program. Modified Works shall not include works that contain only declarations, interfaces, types, classes, structures, or files of the Program solely in each case in order to link to, bind by name, or subclass the Program or Modified Works thereof.

"Distribute" means the acts of a) distributing or b) making available in any manner that enables the transfer of a copy.

"Source Code" means the form of a Program preferred for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

"Secondary License" means either the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0, or any later versions of that license, including any exceptions or additional permissions as identified by the initial Contributor.

2. GRANT OF RIGHTS

  • a) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, Distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, and such Derivative Works.
  • b) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under Licensed Patents to make, use, sell, offer to sell, import and otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, in Source Code or other form. This patent license shall apply to the combination of the Contribution and the Program if, at the time the Contribution is added by the Contributor, such addition of the Contribution causes such combination to be covered by the Licensed Patents. The patent license shall not apply to any other combinations which include the Contribution. No hardware per se is licensed hereunder.
  • c) Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contributions set forth herein, no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity. Each Contributor disclaims any liability to Recipient for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise. As a condition to exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder, each Recipient hereby assumes sole responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed, if any. For example, if a third party patent license is required to allow Recipient to Distribute the Program, it is Recipient's responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Program.
  • d) Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution, if any, to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement.
  • e) Notwithstanding the terms of any Secondary License, no Contributor makes additional grants to any Recipient (other than those set forth in this Agreement) as a result of such Recipient's receipt of the Program under the terms of a Secondary License (if permitted under the terms of Section 3).

3. REQUIREMENTS 3.1 If a Contributor Distributes the Program in any form, then:

  • a) the Program must also be made available as Source Code, in accordance with section 3.2, and the Contributor must accompany the Program with a statement that the Source Code for the Program is available under this Agreement, and informs Recipients how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange; and
  • b) the Contributor may Distribute the Program under a license different than this Agreement, provided that such license:
    • i) effectively disclaims on behalf of all other Contributors all warranties and conditions, express and implied, including warranties or conditions of title and non-infringement, and implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose;
    • ii) effectively excludes on behalf of all other Contributors all liability for damages, including direct, indirect, special, incidental and consequential damages, such as lost profits;
    • iii) does not attempt to limit or alter the recipients' rights in the Source Code under section 3.2; and
    • iv) requires any subsequent distribution of the Program by any party to be under a license that satisfies the requirements of this section 3.
3.2 When the Program is Distributed as Source Code:
  • a) it must be made available under this Agreement, or if the Program (i) is combined with other material in a separate file or files made available under a Secondary License, and (ii) the initial Contributor attached to the Source Code the notice described in Exhibit A of this Agreement, then the Program may be made available under the terms of such Secondary Licenses, and
  • b) a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program.
3.3 Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright, patent, trademark, attribution notices, disclaimers of warranty, or limitations of liability (‘notices') contained within the Program from any copy of the Program which they Distribute, provided that Contributors may add their own appropriate notices.

4. COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users, business partners and the like. While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial use of the Program, the Contributor who includes the Program in a commercial product offering should do so in a manner which does not create potential liability for other Contributors. Therefore, if a Contributor includes the Program in a commercial product offering, such Contributor ("Commercial Contributor") hereby agrees to defend and indemnify every other Contributor ("Indemnified Contributor") against any losses, damages and costs (collectively "Losses") arising from claims, lawsuits and other legal actions brought by a third party against the Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor in connection with its distribution of the Program in a commercial product offering. The obligations in this section do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property infringement. In order to qualify, an Indemnified Contributor must: a) promptly notify the Commercial Contributor in writing of such claim, and b) allow the Commercial Contributor to control, and cooperate with the Commercial Contributor in, the defense and any related settlement negotiations. The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense.

For example, a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering, Product X. That Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor. If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance claims, or offers warranties related to Product X, those performance claims and warranties are such Commercial Contributor's responsibility alone. Under this section, the Commercial Contributor would have to defend claims against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties, and if a court requires any other Contributor to pay any damages as a result, the Commercial Contributor must pay those damages.

5. NO WARRANTY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Each Recipient is solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes all risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement, including but not limited to the risks and costs of program errors, compliance with applicable laws, damage to or loss of data, programs or equipment, and unavailability or interruption of operations.

6. DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER RECIPIENT NOR ANY CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS), HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

7. GENERAL If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agreement, and without further action by the parties hereto, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable.

If Recipient institutes patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Program itself (excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hardware) infringes such Recipient's patent(s), then such Recipient's rights granted under Section 2(b) shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

All Recipient's rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms or conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming aware of such noncompliance. If all Recipient's rights under this Agreement terminate, Recipient agrees to cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable. However, Recipient's obligations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall continue and survive.

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement, but in order to avoid inconsistency the Agreement is copyrighted and may only be modified in the following manner. The Agreement Steward reserves the right to publish new versions (including revisions) of this Agreement from time to time. No one other than the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement. The Eclipse Foundation is the initial Agreement Steward. The Eclipse Foundation may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a suitable separate entity. Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number. The Program (including Contributions) may always be Distributed subject to the version of the Agreement under which it was received. In addition, after a new version of the Agreement is published, Contributor may elect to Distribute the Program (including its Contributions) under the new version.

Except as expressly stated in Sections 2(a) and 2(b) above, Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any Contributor under this Agreement, whether expressly, by implication, estoppel or otherwise. All rights in the Program not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved. Nothing in this Agreement is intended to be enforceable by any entity that is not a Contributor or Recipient. No third-party beneficiary rights are created under this Agreement.

Exhibit A – Form of Secondary Licenses Notice "This Source Code may also be made available under the following Secondary Licenses when the conditions for such availability set forth in the Eclipse Public License, v. 2.0 are satisfied: {name license(s), version(s), and exceptions or additional permissions here}."

Simply including a copy of this Agreement, including this Exhibit A is not sufficient to license the Source Code under Secondary Licenses.

If it is not possible or desirable to put the notice in a particular file, then You may include the notice in a location (such as a LICENSE file in a relevant directory) where a recipient would be likely to look for such a notice.

You may add additional accurate notices of copyright ownership.

GNU Classpath

Classpath is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License with the following clarification and special exception.

Linking this library statically or dynamically with other modules is making a combined work based on this library. Thus, the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License cover the whole combination.

As a special exception, the copyright holders of this library give you permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable under terms of your choice, provided that you also meet, for each linked independent module, the terms and conditions of the license of that module. An independent module is a module which is not derived from or based on this library. If you modify this library, you may extend this exception to your version of the library, but you are not obligated to do so. If you do not wish to do so, delete this exception statement from your version.

As such, it can be used to run, create and distribute a large class of applications and applets. When GNU Classpath is used unmodified as the core class library for a virtual machine, compiler for the java languge, or for a program written in the java programming language it does not affect the licensing for distributing those programs directly.

OpenJDK Assembly Exception

The OpenJDK source code made available by Oracle America, Inc. (Oracle) at openjdk.java.net ("OpenJDK Code") is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License <http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html> version 2 only ("GPL2"), with the following clarification and special exception.

Linking this OpenJDK Code statically or dynamically with other code is making a combined work based on this library. Thus, the terms and conditions of GPL2 cover the whole combination.

As a special exception, Oracle gives you permission to link this OpenJDK Code with certain code licensed by Oracle as indicated at http://openjdk.java.net/legal/exception-modules-2007-05-08.html ("Designated Exception Modules") to produce an executable, regardless of the license terms of the Designated Exception Modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable under GPL2, provided that the Designated Exception Modules continue to be governed by the licenses under which they were offered by Oracle.

As such, it allows licensees and sublicensees of Oracle's GPL2 OpenJDK Code to build an executable that includes those portions of necessary code that Oracle could not provide under GPL2 (or that Oracle has provided under GPL2 with the Classpath exception). If you modify or add to the OpenJDK code, that new GPL2 code may still be combined with Designated Exception Modules if the new code is made subject to this exception by its copyright holder.

Copyright (c) 2026 CData Software, Inc. - All rights reserved.
Build 26.0.9655